JP2013154180A - Pinball game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a pinball game machine including a various function display section wherein it is easy to understand what function LEDs display, regarding special patterns, an operation holding number, or the like.SOLUTION: A pinball game machine includes: a special pattern blinking control means (S641-S645 in Fig.58 (not shown)) performing control to bring the display state of prescribed LEDs (segments G and DP) blinking-displayed during variable display of a special pattern in special pattern display means 38a, 38b into a blinking display state that lighting and extinction are repeated at a first blinking period (e.g., 128 ms); and a holding number blinking control means (S671-S673 in Fig.60 (not shown)) executing control to bring the display state of a blinking in the combination between the lighting and the blinking of light emission patterns in a plurality of LEDs (special pattern 1 holding LEDs 1, 2) of a special pattern holding number display means 38c into a blinking display state of blinking at a second blinking period (e.g., 256 ms) different from the first blinking period.

Description

  The present invention relates to a ball game ball that uses a light emitting diode (LED) to perform a special symbol variation display operation and a holding number display.

  Conventionally, a ball game machine executes a lottery to acquire game information when a game ball enters a first start port or a second start port provided in a game area of a game board, Decide whether or not to generate a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and the result of this lottery will be the form of a variable display operation that includes the start of the variable symbol display and the stop of the variable display as a set. Is displayed on the first special symbol display means or the second special symbol display means, thereby enjoying the symbol variation display game.

  Further, in this type of ball game machine, when a game ball enters the first start port or the second start port and the start condition is satisfied during the symbol change display game, the symbol change display related to the start condition being satisfied. The game start right is temporarily held, and after the current symbol variation display game is completed, the next symbol variation display game is started by digesting the reserved start right. Up to four such starting rights are reserved and stored as so-called “operation holding balls (holding data)”, and the number of the rights is set as the number of operation holdings, the first special symbol holding number display means or the second special symbol. Displayed by the hold number display means.

  The first special symbol display means, the second special symbol display means, the first special symbol reservation number display means, and the second special symbol reservation number display means include a non-game area of the game board, for example, a corner corner of the game board, Various function display units provided at the center of the game board are arranged close to each other as a part of the function display, and a player, a hall clerk, etc. check the various function display units. As a result, the current state and progress of the gaming machine can be recognized.

  On the other hand, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol and the number of operation suspensions related to the special symbol, the above-mentioned various function display units include a normal symbol, the number of reserved balls reserved according to the normal symbol, a gaming state such as a short time and high probability The game information including the number of consecutive operations (number of rounds) of the big prize opening is always displayed. A 7-segment LED display, a plurality of LEDs, and the like are used as display means for these game information.

  For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-222350, a 7-segment LED display for displaying a first special symbol, a 7-segment LED display for displaying a second special symbol, a first special diagram holding lamp, 2. A display device is disclosed that is equipped with a special figure holding lamp and is designed to save space and cost by a display lamp that is devised in arrangement. In JP 2003-180994 A, a plurality of gaming states are displayed by a combination of light emission patterns (lighting, extinguishing and blinking) of four lamps, thereby saving space and cost of the display device. A display device is disclosed.

JP 2007-222350 A JP 2003-180994 A

  However, as described above, a 7-segment LED display for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first special symbol, which are brought close to each other in a narrow non-game area such as a corner corner of the game board. If the LED for holding number display and the second special symbol holding number display are arranged and a plurality of gaming states are displayed by a combination of the light emission patterns (lighting, extinguishing and blinking), the blinking state is It becomes difficult to determine what is meant. For example, if there is a blinking LED, whether it is blinking of a special symbol display system (7-segment LED display for first special symbol display and second special symbol display), or the number of special symbol hold There is a problem that it becomes difficult for a player or the like to blink whether the display system (the LED for displaying the number of first special symbol hold and the second special symbol hold number) is blinking. In particular, when there is no explanatory plate around the special symbol display system LED and the special symbol reservation number display system LED and both of them are blinking simultaneously, it becomes more difficult to distinguish them.

  In addition to the above-mentioned special symbols and the number of operation suspensions related to the special symbols, the game information includes the normal symbols, the number of reserved balls reserved for the normal symbols, the gaming state such as short and medium and high probability, the number of rounds, etc. In the configuration where these are displayed by a combination of light emission patterns (lighting, extinguishing and blinking) of the same type of LED, the player must know which LED is displaying what function. It becomes difficult.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a ball game machine having various function display sections that make it easy to see what function an LED displays regarding a special symbol and the number of operation suspensions related to the special symbol. is there.

  The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(1) a game board (game board 3) having a game area (3a) in which game balls flow down and a non-game area in which game balls do not flow down;
Acquisition means (S314 in FIG. 10, S334 in FIG. 11) for acquiring predetermined game information when a game ball enters a start opening (start openings 34, 35) provided in the game area;
Lottery means (S409 in FIG. 15) for lottery whether to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means;
Executes a variable display operation in which the display of the special symbol for displaying the lottery result in the lottery means and the stop of the variable display are set as a set, and stops the special symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result. Special symbol display means for displaying (LED display 38a for special figure 1 display),
Until the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means is used for execution of the variable symbol display operation of the special symbol in the special symbol display means, the game information is limited to a predetermined maximum reserved memory number. Special symbol storage means (holding storage area of the RAM 203) for holding storage;
Special symbol hold number display means for displaying the number of reserved memories stored and stored in the special symbol operation hold storage means (special figure 1 hold LEDs 1 and 2 of the LED display 38c for hold composite display),
Display control means (main control unit 20: S305 to S309 in FIG. 9, S062 in FIG. 57, S062 in FIG. 59, S660 in FIG. 59) for controlling the display in the special symbol display means and the special symbol reservation number display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The special symbol display means is constituted by a group of LEDs (each segment of the special indicator 1 display LED display 38a) including predetermined LEDs (segments G and DP) blinking during the variation display of the special symbol. And
The special symbol hold number display means includes a plurality of LEDs (a special display 1 of the hold composite display LED display 38c) that displays information related to the number of hold storages in a plurality of display modes by a combination of lighting and blinking of the light emission pattern. It consists of hold LEDs 1, 2)
The group of LEDs constituting the special symbol display means and the plurality of LEDs constituting the special symbol reservation number display means are provided close to each other in the non-game area of the game board ( FIG. 2 and FIG. 51),
The display control means includes
Special symbol display control means for performing display control in the special symbol display means (special symbol display data update process in FIG. 57, LED management process in FIG. 59), and special symbol hold for performing display control in the special symbol hold number display means Number display control means (LED management processing S660, S656 of FIG. 59),
The special symbol display control means includes:
During the period of the variable display of the special symbol, a first repetition period that is sufficiently shorter than the shortest time of the variable display (so that the player can visually recognize the blinking on and off using the naked eye from the player) A symbol variation operation counter (S642 and S643 in FIG. 58) that is updated at a time interval of a millisecond order (for example, 128 ms) and is not updated during the special symbol stop display period,
Based on the value of the symbol variation operation counter, the predetermined LED display mode (“−”) is displayed during the variation display of the special symbol by switching on and off the predetermined LED in the special symbol display means. ”“ · ”) In a blinking display state, and a special symbol blinking control means (S643 to S645 in FIG. 58) for executing control.
The special symbol hold number display control means includes:
A second repetition cycle that is the same as or different from the first repetition cycle that is sufficiently shorter than the shortest time for the variable display (a millisecond that allows the player to visually recognize the blinking on / off state with the naked eye) A pending display operation counter (LED output counter in S671 in FIG. 60) constantly updated at an order time interval (for example, 128 ms or 256 ms);
Based on the value of the operation counter for holding display, the combination of lighting and turning off of the plurality of LEDs in the special symbol holding number display means is switched to turn on and blink the light emission pattern in the plurality of LEDs. Holding number blinking control means (S671 to S673 in FIG. 60) for executing control for placing the blinking display mode in the combination in a blinking display state in which the plurality of LEDs blink in synchronization with each other;
A ball game machine characterized by that.

  (2) The group of LEDs constituting the special symbol display means is composed of the entire LED segments (segments A to G, DP) constituting the segment LED display, and the plurality of LEDs constituting the special symbol holding number display means. The number of LEDs consists of two predetermined LED segments (segments F, G or A, B) of the LED segments constituting the segment LED display, and the bullet ball according to (1) above Gaming machine.

(3) a game board (game board 3) having a game area (3a) in which game balls flow down and a non-game area in which game balls do not flow down;
First acquisition means (S314 in FIG. 10) for acquiring predetermined game information when a game ball enters a first start port (start port 34) provided in the game area;
Second acquisition means (S334 in FIG. 11) for acquiring predetermined game information when a game ball enters a second start port (start port 35) provided in the game area;
First lottery means (S409 in FIG. 15, S421 to S423 in FIG. 16) for lottery whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player based on the game information acquired by the first acquisition means; ,
Second lottery means (S409 in FIG. 15, S421 to S423 in FIG. 16) for lottery whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player based on the game information acquired by the second acquisition means; ,
A variation display operation is performed in which the first special symbol variation display start and the variation display stop for informing the lottery result in the first lottery means are set as one set, and in a display mode according to the lottery result A first special symbol display means for stopping and displaying the first special symbol (LED display 38a for displaying special Fig. 1);
A variable display operation is performed in which the start of the variable display of the second special symbol for notifying the lottery result in the second lottery means and the stop of the variable display are set as one set, and the display mode according to the lottery result Second special symbol display means for stopping and displaying the second special symbol (LED display 38b for special diagram 2 display);
Until the predetermined game information acquired by the first acquisition means is subjected to the execution of the variable symbol display operation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display means, up to a predetermined maximum reserved storage number, A first special symbol storage means for storing the game information in a reserved manner (a special figure 1 storage area that is a first reserved storage area of the RAM 203);
Until the predetermined game information acquired by the second acquisition means is used for the execution of the variable symbol display operation of the special symbol in the second special symbol display means, up to a predetermined maximum reserved memory number, A second special symbol hold storage means for holding the game information on hold (a special figure 2 hold storage area which is a second hold storage area of the RAM 203);
First special symbol hold number display means (special figure 1 hold LEDs 1 and 2 of the LED display 38c for hold composite display) for displaying the number of hold stored in the first special symbol operation hold storage means;
Second special symbol hold number display means (special figure 2 hold LEDs 1 and 2 of the LED display 38c for hold composite display) for displaying the number of hold stored in the second special symbol operation hold storage means;
Display control means for controlling display in the first special symbol display means, the second special symbol display means, the first special symbol reservation number display means, and the second special symbol reservation number display means (main control unit 20: figure 9 S305 to S309, FIG. 57 S631 to S636, FIG. 8 S062, FIG. 59 S660),
A gaming machine comprising
The first special symbol display means and the second special symbol display means include a group of predetermined LEDs (segments G and DP) that are blinked during the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is composed of LEDs (segments of LED display 38a for special figure 1 display and LED display 38b for special figure 2 display),
The first special symbol reservation number display means and the second special symbol reservation number display means each have a plurality of display modes for displaying information on the number of reserved storage in a plurality of display modes by a combination of lighting and flashing of the light emission pattern. It consists of LEDs (Special Figure 1 Retained LEDs 1 and 2 and Special Figure 2 Retained LEDs 1 and 2 of the LED display 38c for holding combined display),
The group of LEDs constituting the first special symbol display means and the second special symbol display means, the plurality of LEDs constituting the first special symbol reservation number display means and the second special symbol reservation number display means. The LEDs are provided close to each other in the non-game area of the game board (see FIGS. 2 and 51),
The display control means includes
During the period of the variable display of the first special symbol, a first repetition period that is sufficiently shorter than the minimum time of the variable display (the player can visually recognize the blinking on and off using the naked eye from the player) A first special symbol variation operation counter (S642, S643 in FIG. 58) updated at a millisecond order time interval, for example, 128 ms.
Based on the value of the first special symbol variation operation counter, the predetermined LED in the first special symbol display unit is switched on and off by switching the predetermined LED on and off. First special symbol blinking control means (S641 to S645 in FIG. 58) for executing control for placing the LED display mode (“−” “•”) in the blinking display state;
A second special symbol variation operation counter that is updated at the first repetition period during the variation display of the second special symbol;
Based on the value of the second special symbol variation operation counter, the predetermined LED during the variation display of the second special symbol is switched by turning on and off the predetermined LED in the second special symbol display means. A second special symbol blinking control means for executing control for placing the LED display mode in the blinking display state;
A second repetition cycle that is the same as or different from the first repetition cycle that is sufficiently shorter than the shortest time for the variable display (a millisecond that allows the player to visually recognize the blinking on / off state with the naked eye) A pending display operation counter (LED output counter in S671 in FIG. 60) constantly updated at an order time interval (for example, 128 ms or 256 ms);
Based on the value of the operation counter for holding display, the first special symbol holding number display means and the second special symbol holding number display means switch the combination of lighting and extinction of the plurality of LEDs. The plurality of LEDs are synchronized with each other in a blinking display mode in the combination of lighting and blinking of the light emission pattern of the plurality of LEDs of the one special symbol reservation number display means and the second special symbol reservation number display means. Holding number blinking control means (S671 to S673 in FIG. 60) for executing control for placing in a blinking blinking display state,
A ball game machine characterized by that.

(4) The group of LEDs constituting the first special symbol display means (38a) is composed of the entire LED segments (segments A to G, DP) constituting the first segment LED display,
The group of LEDs constituting the second special symbol display means consists of the entire LED segments (segments A to G, DP) constituting the second segment LED indicator (38b),
The plurality of LEDs constituting the first special symbol reservation number display means are composed of predetermined two LED segments (segments F and G) of the third segment LED indicator (38c),
Further, the plurality of LEDs constituting the second special symbol reservation number display means are different from the predetermined two LED segments of the third segment LED indicator (38c). The ball game machine according to (3) above, comprising LED segments (segments A and B).

  According to the present invention, it is easy to understand what function the LED displays regarding the special symbol and the number of operation suspensions in the ball game machine.

It is a perspective view of the front side which shows the external appearance of the bullet ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the front side of the game board of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control apparatus of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description about the transition state of the game state of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the prefetch notice effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 starting port check process in FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the random number determination process in FIG. 11 in FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a special stop symbol data creation process in FIG. 11 in FIG. 10. In FIG. 10, it is a flowchart which shows the starting opening winning random number determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the random-number determination process for special electric component operation | movement determination in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special stop symbol creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the second half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electrically-powered article management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding addition command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern designation | designated command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol designation | designated command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a figure which shows the hit random number determination table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the jackpot symbol table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the small hit symbol table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the lose symbol table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the offset correction process for a variation pattern selection at the time of winning which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning command distribution table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning prize command distribution table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the lose prize command distribution table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the pending | holding addition commands which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table for jackpot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table for jackpots concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the offset correction process for fluctuation pattern selection at the time of a fluctuation | variation start which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st hierarchy of the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table 1st hierarchy based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table 2nd hierarchy based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table 2nd hierarchy based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the hit fluctuation pattern commands which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the loss fluctuation pattern commands which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution designation | designated number table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the jackpot start setting table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the various function display part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a wiring diagram of the block which comprises the various function display part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the proper use of the LED display data table for special symbol displays in the special symbol display which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and its display switching aspect. It is explanatory drawing of the function of each segment which comprises the LED display for holding | maintenance composite display in the various function display part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of the function of LED which comprises the common figure and round display block in the various function display part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the proper use of the LED display data table for special figure 1 hold display, and its display switching aspect in the special figure 1 hold display which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the special symbol display data update process in the special symbol management process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the symbol display data creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the LED management process in the main control side timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing details of a pending number data creation process in FIG. 59. FIG. It is a figure which shows the work area | region of RAM regarding control of the various function display part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the special symbol LED output data table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of LED data table A and B which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the LED group selected by the scanning signal of dynamic lighting common C0-C3 in one Embodiment of this invention, and LED data D0-D7 selected and driven separately. It is a figure which shows each display switching aspect by switching of the LED display data tables A and A for special symbol displays which concern on one Embodiment of this invention, and LED display data tables A and B for special figure 1 hold displays. It is the time chart which showed the method of the display control of the special symbol display system LED display which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and the display control of a reservation number display system LED display.

  Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a ball game machine according to the present invention.

<1. Outline of Configuration: FIGS. 1 and 2>
With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the outline | summary of a structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1, the structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game is stored in a game board storage frame (not shown) attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted, and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is faced to the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting a transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. When the key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the glass door 6 is locked to the front frame 2. When operated to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

  A front operation panel 7 pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is disposed below the glass door 6. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

  The upper tray unit 8 has a ball release button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 to the lower side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and pays out the game balls to a game ball lending device (not shown). And a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable medium inserted in the game ball rental device. Further, the upper tray unit 8 has a built-in lamp that is lit during a predetermined input reception period and can be operated (input reception is possible), and a push button that can change the effect by pressing when the built-in lamp is lit. An expression frame effect button 13 is provided. This frame effect button 13 functions as a manual operation means that can be operated by the player.

  A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. Speakers 46 that produce sound effects (sound effects) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15. In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 that provide a light effect by decoration of light are provided at various locations on the glass door 6.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in FIG. 2 is mainly composed of a substantially square wooden plywood or resin board. As shown in the figure, the game board 3 is provided with a ball guide rail 5 that guides the launched game ball in a ring shape as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed. It is a game area 3a, and the four corners are non-game areas.

  In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (design variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) A liquid crystal display device 36 (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) is provided that is capable of variable display and stop display of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and right symbol (corresponding to the right display area). It has been. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images under the control of an effect control unit 24 described later.

  Further, a center decoration 48 is provided in the game area 3a so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a distant manner. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and is a member that enables the flow path of game balls to be distributed to the left and right according to the strength or stroke length of the game balls. Distribution means). In the present embodiment, the center ornament 48 is arranged at the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, whereby a flow path of game balls is formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) in the game area 3a. ing. However, in the case of this embodiment, the center ornament 48 has a shape bulging slightly to the right.

  The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and is fixed to the game board 3 with a fixing screw or the like, and forms the outer periphery of the center decoration 48 and displays on the liquid crystal display device 36. An armor frame portion 48b surrounding the screen is integrally provided. The armor frame portion 48b protrudes substantially from the front mounting plate 48a to the front side, and prevents the game ball from entering the inside, that is, the liquid crystal display device 36 side. A play area through which a game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is guided to the right side. The game balls driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and the left down flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 and the right down flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down either. Such a center ornament 48 functions as a game ball drop direction changing member (drop direction changing means) that changes the fall direction of the game ball.

  Although not shown in the figure, the center decoration 48 is provided with a game ball that is entered from a entrance (not shown) provided on the left side of the armor frame 48b at the front lower portion of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the horizontal direction. The stage is provided so that it can freely roll and drop from the center in the left-right direction (starting port guide path) or from both the left and right sides. In addition, the center ornament 48 is provided with a movable body accessory (not shown) that provides a visual effect by its operation mode at an appropriate place.

  In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a function display section. Here, a 7 segment display (with dots) is connected to the upper start opening 34 (for the first special symbol). A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) are provided side by side corresponding to the lower start opening 35 (for the second special symbol). It has been. The special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are configured to execute a special symbol variation display game by a variation display operation of a special symbol expressed by 7 segments (a variation display operation including a variation start and a variation stop as one set). Yes. Further, the liquid crystal display device 36 is adapted to temporally synchronize with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, and to display the decorative symbol variation by the image. (The details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

  In addition, in the various function display units, a reserved composite display LED display 38c including a 7-segment display (with dots) is disposed next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The combination was called the display of the number of balls with special action 1, the number of balls with special action 2, the number of balls with special action 2, the variable time shortening function is active (short time), and the high probability state (high probability) This is because it is a hold / short time / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as a hold composite display device) having five display functions called status notification.

  The various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality (two in this embodiment) of LEDs are arranged next to the LED display 38c for holding composite display. It has been. In the normal symbol display device 39a, the normal symbol variation display operation expressed by two LEDs (turns on and off alternately in a seesaw manner, and turns off when either side is lit to determine whether or not it is correct). ), The normal symbol variation display game is executed. In addition, a round number display device 39b formed by arranging three LEDs adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a is provided.

  Below the center decoration 48, an upper start opening 34 (first special symbol start opening) and a normal variable winning device 41 having a lower start opening 35 (second special symbol start opening) are provided above and below, Detection sensors 34a, 35a (upper start opening sensor 34a, lower start opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the game ball are formed inside each.

  The upper start port 34, which is the first special symbol start port, is referred to as a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). FIG. 1 is a prize-winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and is configured as a winning-rate fixed-type winning apparatus that does not have a starting opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). Yes. In the present embodiment, a game ball dropping direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a is operated to the upper start port 34 to the left-down flow path 3b. The game balls that have flowed down the game are easy to win, whereas the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c have a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to win.

  The normal variation winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variation type winning device that can vary the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port by means of the starting port opening / closing means, and specifically, a second special symbol starting port. A certain lower starting port 35 is configured as a so-called “electric tulip type” winning device including a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 that can be opened or enlarged. The lower start opening 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 2”) in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). The winning area of the lower starting opening 35 is an opening that facilitates winning according to the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable blade piece 47. It is converted into a state (easy winning state) and a closed state (winning difficult state) that makes it difficult or impossible to win than the open state. In the present embodiment, when the movable blade piece 47 is inactive, a closed state (a state in which a prize cannot be awarded) is held such that a prize cannot be awarded to the lower start port 35.

  On both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are four general winning ports 43, three on the left side and one on the right side, and a total of four general winning ports for detecting the passage of game balls. A sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

  Further, a normal symbol start opening 37 including a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally right above the normal variation winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. . The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning port related to the normal symbol variation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and a normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball is provided therein. Is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start opening 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left flow path 3b is not limited thereto. You may form only.

  In the middle of the path from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow path 3c, a special variable winning that is configured such that the big winning port 50 can be opened or expanded by the retractable opening door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 50 is formed therein.

  Around the big prize opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. Yes. And if the big prize opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the big prize opening closed state), by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55, the downstream guide part ( A part of the upper side 55a) is formed. In the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely in the game area above the big winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. 51d is provided so as to move the flowing game balls toward the big prize opening 50.

  The process of entering a game ball into the big prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 projects on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. Come down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correcting plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, and thereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the big prize opening 50 (downward direction). At this time, if the special winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the special winning opening is closed), the game ball rolls on the special winning opening in a predetermined arrangement (not shown). By the game nail, it is led in the direction of the tulip-type normal variation winning device 41 (lower start opening 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (start opening open state), a game ball can win the lower start opening 35. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the special winning opening 50 is open (large winning opening opened state), the game ball is guided into the special winning opening 50. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player aims the launch position on the special variable prize winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start is performed. The game ball is difficult to be guided to the mouth 34 side or is not guided. Therefore, in the closed state of the big prize opening, unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 is operated, it is difficult or impossible to win the start openings 34 and 35.

  When the winning means described above belong to which of the left and right flow paths, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can be won, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b Has a top start port 34, a bottom start port 35, and three general winning ports 43 on the left side. The winning means belonging to the right flow down path 3c include the top start port 34, the bottom start port 35, and the normal symbol start port. 37, a large winning opening 50, and one general winning opening 43 on the right side.

  The lower start port 35 belongs to both the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c as long as the movable blade piece 47 is open (start port open state), and can be awarded from any of the left and right flow down paths. ing. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 has the operating condition that the game ball passes (wins) to the normal symbol start opening 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, it is substantially the right flow down. It can be said that it belongs only to the path 3c.

  In addition, the upper start port 34 generally belongs only to the left flow down path 3b or the left flow down path 3b, and it is difficult or impossible to win the game ball from the right flow down path 3c. That is, the arrangement of the game nail and other game parts in the game area 3a is the same as that of the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 3b (including the game ball that has passed through the stage of the center decoration 48). However, the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c are arranged so as to form a guide path that is difficult to guide or does not guide to the upper start opening 34.

  Further, the big winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game balls from the right flow path 3c can win.

  Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the big winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a. The detection switch (winning detection switch) such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43a is a game that has entered the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting a ball. The winning detection switch can be constituted by a non-contact switch such as a photo switch or a proximity switch, or a contact switch such as a micro switch.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the various winning holes provided in the gaming area 3a, if there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37, it is promised for each winning opening. The number of winning balls per winning ball (for example, three for the upper start opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35, 13 for the large winning opening 40, 10 for the general winning opening 43) is the game ball payout device 19 (FIG. 3)). Note that the game balls that have not won the above winning holes are discharged from the game area 3 a through the out port 49. Here, “winning” is not a structure in which a winning opening takes a game ball inside, or a winning opening takes a game ball inside, but a winning opening made of a pass-through gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). If the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning slot, the winning prize will be “winning”. It is treated as having occurred. The game ball related to the winning is also referred to as “winning ball”.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device according to the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit (main control means) 20 that performs overall control (game operation control) related to game operations in general, and an effect control command from the main control unit 20. In response, an effect control unit (effect control means) 24 that comprehensively controls effect operation control (performance appearance control) for images, light, and sound, and a payout control board (payout control means) that performs payout control of prize balls. 29 and a power supply board (power supply control means) 31 that generates and supplies power necessary for the gaming machine from an external power supply (not shown). In addition, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. In FIG. 3, the power supply route is omitted.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), a ROM 202 (main control ROM), and a RAM 203 (main control RAM). As a whole, a microcomputer (equivalent to a Z80 system) ). The ROM 202 stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure. The RAM 203 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for the progress of the game is stored and used according to the processing state. Although not shown, the main control unit 20 generates a random number for lottery relating to the special symbol variation display game, a periodic interrupt to the Z80 system, and a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) with a constant cycle. And an interrupt controller circuit that includes an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt that provides an interrupt signal to the CPU, and a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) that provides a time measurement function .

  Here, the CPU 201 is a CPU of Z80 (manufactured by Zylog or equivalent). Z80 is a CPU with a data bus of 8 bits and an address bus of 16 bits, but does not require a large memory space, and it is ideal for controlling pachinko machines that do not require high-speed processing or complicated numerical operation processing. It is. The CPU 201 is provided with a plurality of types of registers for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing. Specifically, the A register (accumulator ACC), the F register (flag register), and the B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (general purpose registers) for storing general-purpose data are stored. PC register (program counter PC) for storing data indicating the position of the program inside, SP register (stack pointer SP) for storing the stack pointer (address indicating the current position of the stack area), RAM 401b for performing the refresh operation R register (refresh counter) in which data indicating the memory block is stored, IX in which data indicating a reference position when referring to the storage area of the RAM 401b is stored, IY register (index register), when an interrupt occurs Data indicating the location of the interrupt table to be referenced is stored A register (interrupt vector register) is provided, and main registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L), auxiliary registers (A ′, F ′, B ′, C ′, D ′) , E ′, H ′, L ′) and dedicated registers (I, R, IX, IY, SP, PC).

  The main control unit 20 detects the passage of the upper start opening 34a for detecting the winning to the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening sensor 35a for detecting the winning to the lower start opening 35, and the normal symbol start opening 37. The normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, a large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting a winning at the large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting a winning at the general winning opening 43 are connected. Detection signals from these can be received.

  Further, the main control unit 20 includes an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable blade piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. And the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the special symbol. The main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and can transmit a control signal for display control of the normal symbol.

  In addition, a composite display device 38c is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of various information displayed on the composite display device 38c. The main control unit 20 is connected to a round number display device 39b, and can transmit a control signal for display control of a specified number of rounds by jackpot.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to an external concentration terminal board 21 for frames, and information relating to game progress (for example, information on winning big wins, information on the number of winning balls, information on the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed, etc.) Transmission to the hall computer HC via the terminal board 21 is possible. The hall computer HC is a management computer that comprehensively manages pachinko hall gaming machines, and is arranged outside the gaming machine.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a payout control board (payout control unit) 29. Connected to the payout control board 29 are a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 for controlling the launch device 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for paying out game balls. The main control unit 20 can send a payout control command (a payout control command for designating the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29. On the other hand, the payout control board 29 can transmit information related to the payout operation state (payout state signal) to the main control unit 20. On the main control unit 20 side, based on this payout state signal, whether or not the game ball payout device 19 is functioning normally, specifically, there is a problem in payout of award balls (payout error: for example, a ball jam or a prize It is monitored whether or not the ball is not paid out.

  Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit an effect control command carrying information related to the special symbol variation display game to the effect control unit 24. Such a production control command from the main control unit 20 is produced by one-way communication in order to prevent an illegal signal due to an external goto action from being input to the main control unit 20 via the production control unit 24. It is transmitted to the control unit 24.

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The production control unit 24 includes a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (production control CPU), and is mainly configured by a microcomputer with a ROM 242 (production control ROM) and a RAM 243 (production control RAM). An interrupt controller circuit having an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a sound source IC, a CTC, and a timer interrupt is provided. The ROM 242 stores various data necessary for the rendering operation control in addition to the rendering control program in which the rendering control procedure is described. Further, the RAM 243 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for producing an effect is stored and used according to the processing state. The main roles of the production control unit 24 are reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection of production based on production control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, decorative lamps. 45, LED light emission control, movable body accessory operation control, and the like.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display control of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is an image ROM storing VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image development processing. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU. A liquid crystal control ROM that stores the described program and various data necessary for display control thereof, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory are mainly configured.

  In addition, the production control unit 24 performs a light production and a sound production, a light display control unit for the light display device 45a including the decorative lamp 45 and the LED, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, A drive control unit (motor drive circuit) for the movable body accessory motor 61 is provided.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected with a frame effect button 13 that can be operated by the player, and can receive an operation detection signal from the frame effect button 13. In addition, the effect control unit 24 is connected to an accessory motor 61 for controlling the operation of the movable accessory, and can transmit a control signal for controlling the movable accessory motor 61.

  The effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, and controls various effect means at a necessary timing. To do. Thereby, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting and blinking driving of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns are developed in time series. By doing so, a “production scenario” in a broad sense is realized.

  The effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and an event (EVENT) of 1-byte length. In order to distinguish MODE from EVENT, MODE Bit 7 is Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is set to OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and transmits the first strobe signal after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. I do. Furthermore, event (EVENT) information is set and output after the elapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second time of the strobe signal is transmitted after the elapse of the predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled by the CPU 201 to be in an active state for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 can reliably receive a command.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become. Unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process executed periodically). Even in such a case, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if another interrupt occurs simultaneously.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a gaming operation according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol change display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on a predetermined start condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, the main control unit 20 The “big hit lottery” is performed by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner to start the special symbol variation display game. Derived and displayed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

  Here, in this embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning to the upper start opening 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning to the lower start opening 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the big hit lottery result regarding the upper start port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big hit lottery result regarding the lower start port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that a game ball has entered the upper start opening 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that a game ball has entered the lower start opening 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol variation display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game is started in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, after the predetermined variation display time has elapsed, if the big win lottery result is “big hit”, it is in a predetermined “big hit” mode, otherwise In this case, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined “losing” manner, and thereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived.

  In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side. The variation display game is referred to as “special symbol variation display game 2”. Unless otherwise required, “special symbol 1” and “special symbol 2” are simply referred to as “special symbols” (sometimes abbreviated as “special symbol”), and “special symbol variation display game 1” and “special symbol” The symbol variation display game 2 ”is simply referred to as“ special symbol variation display game ”.

  In addition, when the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 36, and various effects are developed accompanying this. Is done. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorated design is derived. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the stunning ornamental symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

  For example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is “big hit”, the decoration symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. In the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the special symbol is a big hit (for example, the 7-segment display state is “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, “right”. In each display area of “”, the display pattern in which the decorative symbol reflects “big hit” (for example, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” display areas, the three decorative symbols are “7”, “7”, “ 7 ”display state).

  When this “big hit” is reached, that is, the special symbol variation display game is ended, and the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated accordingly. The big prize opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the variable prize winning device 52 is actuated to open the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern, thereby opening and closing the big prize opening 50. An advantageous special gaming state (big hit game) occurs. In this jackpot game, the number of game balls that have won a prize at the big prize opening (the big prize opening) until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example) elapses by the opening door 52b. 50 (the number of winning balls) is a predetermined number (maximum number of winnings: the maximum number of winning balls allowed for an opened winning opening is increased by one operation of an accessory: for example, 9) Until the value reaches the predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 15 rounds) where the winning area is opened or expanded and the big winning opening is closed when either of these conditions is met. Round) repeated. The condition for closing the special winning opening 50 is not limited to this, and it may be based only on the opening time of the special winning opening or only based on the number of game balls won in the special winning opening. Also good.

  When the jackpot game is started, an opening effect for informing that the jackpot is started is performed first, and after the opening effect is finished, the round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. Then, after the specified number of rounds is finished, an ending effect for notifying that the jackpot is finished is performed, and thereby the jackpot game is finished. In other words, the jackpot game is roughly divided into an opening effect, a round game, and an ending effect. However, the round game execution period excluding the opening effect period and the ending effect period in the closed state of the big prize opening may be regarded as a big hit game period.

  Regarding the information necessary for the execution of the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 is based on the fact that a game ball enters (wins) the upper start opening 34 or the lower start opening 35. Whether the game is detected by the upper start sensor 34a or the lower start sensor 35a and the start condition (the start condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied, whether the game is “big hit” or “lost” A lottery lottery including a 'winning lottery' and a 'slotted lottery' that draws the type of jackpot if it is 'hits', and a 'symbol lottery' that draws the type of loser if it is 'losing'. Based on the above, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped are determined. Then, as the effect control command for specifying the processing state, “variation pattern including special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information on the result of jackpot lottery result, variation time of special symbol, presence / absence of specific effect (for example, notice effect)), etc. The “designation command” and the “decoration design designation command” including information on the special stop symbol are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Thereby, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24.

  The effect control unit 24 develops the effect during the decoration symbol variation display game based on information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decoration symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The contents (production scenario) and the decoration symbol (decoration stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined, and the decoration symbol is variably displayed according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbol to execute the decoration symbol variation display game. As a result, the decorative symbols by the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in synchronism with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Are substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of the image (image effect), the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED, etc. are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display reflecting the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decoration symbol variation display game. These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the passing (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37, “main lottery” is performed by the random number lottery in the main control unit 20. Based on the lottery result, the normal symbol displayed on the LED is displayed in a normal symbol display device 39a in a variable manner to start a normal symbol variation display game. After a certain period of time, the result is converted into a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. And stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is “per assistance”, the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is turned on in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are on, or “O” and “ The display is stopped when the “○” side LED among the LEDs representing “x” is in a lighting state).

  When this "subsidiary hit" is reached, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is actuated, thereby opening the movable blade 47 in a reverse "C" shape and opening the lower start port 35. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to enter a state in which the game ball is likely to flow in (opening opening state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as “general power open game”) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this open electric game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 won the open time of the lower start opening 35 until a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses or the lower start opening 35 was won. Until the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when one of these conditions is satisfied, the lower start opening 35 is closed a predetermined number of times (for example, , Up to 2 times). The condition for closing the lower start opening 35 is not limited to this, and it may be based only on the opening time of the lower winning opening, or only based on the number of game balls won in the lower winning opening. Also good.

  Here, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the regular symbol variation display game, during the big hit game, or during the open game, a prize is awarded to the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening 35 or the normal symbol start opening 37. When this occurs, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start sensor 34a, the lower start sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied, this embodiment Then, this is stored as data relating to the start right of each variable display game up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, a maximum of four), except for those related during variable display. The pending data (holding data) that has not been subjected to the symbol variation display operation or a game ball related to the pending data is also referred to as an “operation holding ball”. In order to clarify the number of the operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a holding provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 Turn on the indicator. In the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls relating to special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are held as the number of changes in the special symbol or normal symbol. In addition, the maximum memory | storage number of the number of operation hold balls regarding special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and a normal symbol is not restrict | limited in particular. In addition, the maximum number of memory for the number of operation-reserved balls different for each symbol may be set (for example, a maximum of four on the special symbol 1 side, a maximum of two on the special symbol 2 side, a maximum of six on the normal symbol side, etc. ). In addition, regarding the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the maximum number of stored operation-reserved balls on the symbol side where the profit obtained as a result of the big hit lottery is relatively high may be set. In the present embodiment, since the big hit lottery related to the special symbol 2 can obtain a big hit type with a high profit for the player (see FIG. 42 described later), for example, a maximum of four special symbols 2 side, a maximum special symbol 1 side It may be set to one.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the jackpot that is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a “probability variation (hereinafter, abbreviated as“ probability variation ”) function” that the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) serves as a function unit. There are two types, a probability changing function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol probability changing function”) and a probability changing function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol probability changing function”).

  The special symbol probability changing function changes the probability of winning a lottery from a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/3 of 19.9). Is a function that generates an advantageous “high probability state”. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability changing function is in operation, the big hit lottery probability is high, so that the big hit is likely to occur. Therefore, it can be said that the gaming state expected by the player is a gaming state in which this special symbol probability changing function is operating. The details of the operation start condition and the operation end condition of the special symbol probability changing function will be described later.

  The normal symbol probability changing function changes the low probability (for example, 1/256) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) that the lottery probability per auxiliary is a predetermined probability (ordinary probability), so that it is more than the normal gaming state. This is a function for generating an advantageous “probability change state per auxiliary”. Under the game state in which this normal symbol probability changing function is operating (probability per assist change state), since the lottery probability per auxiliary is in a high probability state, auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and open-game games frequently occur. Thus, the operating rate is improved so that the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol probability changing function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time-shortening function described later, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time-shortening function. This is the same condition as the operation end condition.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a “variable time reduction (hereinafter referred to as“ time reduction ”) function” that the main control unit 20 serves as a functional unit. There are two types of time reduction functions related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol time reduction functions”) and time reduction functions related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol time reduction functions”).

  The special symbol time reduction function shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is fixedly displayed (average fluctuation time of the special symbol)). This is a function that generates a special symbol short-time state. Under the gaming state in which the special symbol time reduction function is activated (special symbol short time state), the average variation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for the variation without reach) Is reduced from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), a lottery number improvement state is achieved in which the number of big lotteries per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the special symbol short-time state does not occur, This is due to the control process.

  The normal symbol time shortening function is the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from the start of normal symbols to the final display (average fluctuation time of normal symbols)) This is a function to generate a shortened "normal symbol time short state". Under the game state in which the normal symbol short-time function is activated (normal symbol short-time state), the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, from 10 seconds to 1 second). In other words, the number of lotteries is improved so that the number of lotteries per auxiliary time per unit time is improved as compared with the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the normal symbol short-time state does not occur. This is due to the control process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol short-time function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol short-time function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol short-time function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions.

  Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 serves as a function unit.

  The open extension function is a function for generating an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period (at least one of the opening time and the number of opening times of the movable blade piece 47) of the movable blade piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 is extended. is there. This open extended state is referred to as a so-called “electric chew support state”. Under the gaming state (open extended state) in which the open extension function is operating, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds, for example. The number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from once (when the opening extension function is not in operation) to twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), and the movable wing piece 47 per unit time than in the normal gaming state. The operating rate is improved so that the operating rate is improved. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the opening extension function is the same condition as the operation start condition of the special symbol time shortening function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time shortening function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions. Therefore, during the open extended state, the normal symbol probability changing function and the normal symbol time-shortening function also act, so that a gaming state in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is remarkably improved occurs.

  By operating one or more types of the functions as described above, it is possible to change the internal gaming state of the gaming machine. Here, in this embodiment, the operation start conditions of the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function, so each function operates at the same opportunity. Will do. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability changing function, the special symbol time shortening function, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time shortening function, and the open extension function are referred to as “probability changing state”. A gaming state from which the special symbol probability changing function is removed is referred to as a “short-time state”, and a gaming state in which only the special symbol probability changing function is activated is referred to as a “latent probability varying state (latent probability or latent probability state)”, and not all functions are in operation. The (non-operating) state is referred to as “normal gaming state”. Therefore, when paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is the “short-time state” or “normal gaming state”, at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes the “low probability state”, and the gaming state becomes “latent”. In the case of “probability state” or “probability change state”, at least the big hit lottery probability becomes a “high probability state”. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned “time-short state” does not occur independently. Further, during the big hit, all functions are deactivated, and basically, the player is placed in the same gaming state as the normal gaming state.

(3-2-1. High base gaming state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function. Will operate at the same opportunity. However, when attention is paid to the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time-shortening function, and the open extension function, respectively, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operating rate of the movable blade piece 47 is improved. Since the operating rate is improved and the winning frequency at the lower start opening 35 is increased, the gaming condition is that the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the big win lottery result is higher than the normal gaming state. "Base gaming state (starting condition improved state)". The “high base gaming state” here refers to a gaming state when a function relating to a normal symbol is activated, and a function relating to a special symbol, that is, at least one of a special symbol probability changing function and a special symbol time-shortening function is activated. It is different from the game state when doing.

  On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol short-time function) individually, when the above special symbol probability changing function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability state” which is higher than the normal gaming state. When the special symbol short-time function is activated, the special symbol variation display game has a “special symbol short-time state” in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is earlier than the normal gaming state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the “high base gaming state” in which the starting frequency of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as an example of the “high base game state”, the electric chew support state provided with the open extension function is handled as the “high base game state”. Under the electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normally variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower start opening 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Therefore, the game state is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the electronic chew support state is not set (low base game state). When paying attention to the presence or absence of the electric chew support state, when the game state is “normal game state” or “latent probability state”, there is “no electric chew support state” (hereinafter referred to as “no electric support state”). When the game state is “time-short state” or “probability change state”, “electric chew support state exists” (hereinafter referred to as “electric support state”).

  In the present embodiment, one game state is further classified and managed in order to diversify the effects related to the game state. Specifically, the “normal gaming state” includes a plurality of types of “normal gaming state A (normal A)”, “normal gaming state B (normal B)”, and “normal gaming state C (normal C)”. A normal gaming state is included and managed as different gaming states. That is, even in the same normal game state, the conditions (variation pattern selection mode) for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol are different. As a result, the operation status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability or the presence or absence of electric support, etc. In the case of paying attention to “game state”, a plurality of types of game states (variation pattern selection mode (variation patterns shown in FIG. An effect corresponding to each pattern allocation designation number (see Tcode)) can be generated. Furthermore, in this embodiment, while the internal gaming state is the same “latency state”, the production is managed as “normal A”, “normal B”, or “normal C”, and the above-mentioned normal gaming state It is possible to generate effects corresponding to the same gaming state as “Normal A” to “Normal C” (details regarding transition conditions of each gaming state and special variation patterns for specifying the contents of the effects will be described later) To do). The types of “internal gaming state” when focusing on the functions relating to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support in the present embodiment include a normal gaming state, a latent probability state, and a probability variation state. The types of “game state” (types of variation pattern selection mode) when attention is paid to the determination of effects include normal A, normal B, normal C, and probability change state.

  In this way, in this embodiment, the internal gaming state is managed by managing the gaming state (internal gaming state) focused on the jackpot lottery probability and the presence / absence of electric support as different from the gaming state focused on the production determination. Even if they are the same, a plurality of types of effect modes can be realized. Thereby, the variation of the production under the same internal game state can be made rich. In the present specification, unless otherwise required, the internal gaming state and the gaming state when attention is paid to the determination of the effect are handled in the same row.

<4. About winning>
Next, “winning” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. Type per hit)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform a big hit lottery for a plurality of types of hits. The hit types include "15R long open probability variable big hit", "10R long open positive variable big hit", "2R short open latent big hit", and "small hit (small hit A, small hit B, and small hit C)" Includes multiple types of hits.

  Among these hits, “15R long open probability change big hit”, “10R long open probability change big hit”, and “2R short open latent change big hit” are hits belonging to the “big hit” type that triggers the operation of the condition device. "Is a hit belonging to the" non-big hit "type that does not trigger the condition device. Here, the “condition device” is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, in which a combination of specific special symbols is displayed or a game ball is displayed. The one that operates when it passes a specific area in the big prize opening. Both the hits belonging to the “big hit” type and the hits (small hits) belonging to the “non-big hit” type are hits that trigger the transition to a special gaming state involving opening / closing operations of the big prize opening. Therefore, hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type are different from simple “losing”.

  Of the hits belonging to the 'big hit' type, “15R long open probability change big hit”, “10R long open probability change big hit”, and “2R short open probability big hit” have at least a high probability of the gaming state after the big hit game ends. It is a big hit that belongs to a “probability big hit” to be shifted to a gaming state with a state (in this embodiment, a probability variation state or a latent probability state). Note that “small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type, but unless otherwise necessary, it is treated as one of the big hit types in the same row without being distinguished from the above big hit.

(4-2. Per game)
Next, the winning game based on each hit described above will be described.

(4-2-1.15R long opening chance change hit game)
The winning game with 15R long open probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “15R probability variable big hit game”) is a big hit with a prescribed number of rounds of 15 rounds. The maximum opening time is set to “29.8 seconds” of “long opening time”. Here, the “long open time” means that there is a possibility that the number of winnings in the big winning opening within the time will reach the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) (the possibility of reaching the maximum number of winnings is sufficient). It is determined as a time span.

  After the round game is started and the grand prize opening 50 is opened, when the above maximum opening time elapses, the big prize opening 50 is closed and the current round game is finished, and the prescribed round number of 15 rounds is reached. If not, after a predetermined time (interval between rounds) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. However, even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, if the number of game balls (the number of winning balls) won in the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, nine), the big winning opening 50 is closed. After the current round game is over and a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. In other words, when the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed, or when the number of game balls won in the grand prize opening reaches the maximum number of winnings, the opened big prize opening is met Is closed and the game is shifted to the next round game after a predetermined interval time (the same applies to the winning game by 10R long opening probability change big hit described later, and the winning game by 2R short opening latent big hit) . The above-mentioned “interval time between rounds” between round games is “remaining ball discharge time” and “interval time before opening” after the remaining ball discharge time elapses until the next round game starts. Consists of. The above “remaining ball discharge time” refers to an extra time (for example, 1980 ms) for discharging the remaining balls inside the big winning opening after the closing of the big winning opening. As the time width, the big winning opening is closed. Sufficient time is required until the game ball won immediately before passing through a winning detection switch (large winning opening sensor 52a) formed in the large winning opening. Also, the “interval before opening” means that after the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time has passed and the remaining balls in the big winning opening are considered discharged, the big winning opening in the next round game is released. Time width (for example, 20 ms). Even if the big prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball during this pre-opening interval, the game ball is treated as invalid.

(4-2-2.10R Long Opening Probability Hit Game with a Big Hit)
The winning game by 10R long open probability variable big hit (hereinafter referred to as “10R positive variable big hit game”) is the same as the content of the 15R positive variable big hit game described above except that the prescribed number of rounds is ten. Therefore, the 10R probability variable big hit game is a big hit game to which a relatively lower profit is given than the 15R probability variable big hit game (in this embodiment, there is a difference in the number of winning balls for five rounds).

(4-2-2R winning game with short open latency big hit)
In a win game based on 2R short-open latency big hit (hereinafter, referred to as “2R latent big hit game”), the number of rounds is a big hit with 15 rounds. In this embodiment, a big prize opening in one round game The maximum opening time of 50 is set to 0.1 seconds of “short opening time”. Here, the “short opening time” is defined as a time span in which it is difficult to win a prize winning itself. In the present embodiment, one of the conditions for closing the big prize opening is within the “short opening time”, depending on the performance of the launching device (for example, the continuous shooting speed performance of game balls per unit time) and the formation position of the big prize opening. It is impossible to reach the “Maximum Wins”. In 2R latent big hit games, the big winning opening 50 is only opened for a short time and the number of round games is as small as two rounds, so it is a big hit game with virtually no winning balls. (Accurately, there is a possibility that a winning of the big winning opening 50 may also occur, but since the maximum opening time of the big winning opening of each round game is set to a short opening time, the possibility is extremely low. Virtually no prize balls can be obtained).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the number of award balls in the big hit game, in other words, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player (the number of winning prize balls) is different according to the type of the big hit. Yes. In addition, although it has been described that the maximum opening time is set to the short opening time in the 2R latent large hit game, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same long open time as 15R probability variable big hit game or 10R probability variable big hit game may be set so that a winning to the big winning opening 50 is allowed to some extent, and it is difficult or impossible to reach the maximum winning number. Although it is possible, it is set to an opening time (an intermediate opening time shorter than the long opening time and longer than the short opening time: for example, 5 seconds) that can secure a certain number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50. May be. In order to vary the number of winning balls, the maximum winning number may be set to a different number according to the type of jackpot.

(4-2-3. Winning game with small hits (A per small hit-C per small hit))
In a hit game with a small hit A to a small hit C (hereinafter referred to as “small hit game”), the big prize opening 50 is opened twice, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 50 per round is 2R. It is set to 0.1 seconds, which corresponds to the maximum opening time of the game with a large probability of winning, and the interval time from the closing of the first winning port 50 to the opening of the second winning port 50 is 2R. The same time width as the interval time is set. Also, regarding the closing condition of the big winning opening 50 in the small hit game, whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, 9) Either one of the conditions is satisfied. This is also the same as the 2R latent big hit game. That is, during the small hit game, the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 50 captured from the appearance is controlled in substantially the same operation mode as that of the 2R latent big hit game.

  Since this “small hit” is a hit type that does not trigger the operation of the “condition device”, a round game like “big hit” is not executed. However, by controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening 50 in substantially the same manner of operation as the 2R latent big hit game, a pseudo round game was realized, and it seemed that the 2R short open big hit big hit was won. It is possible to dress like In addition, the hit effect during the small hit game (the effect that appears during the hit game) has the same or very similar effect as the hit effect during the 2R latent large hit game. In other words, the operation related to the small hit game including the hit effect shows substantially the same behavior as the operation related to the 2R short open latency big hit, and which hit game is executed as viewed from the player side. Identification is difficult or impossible. As a result, even if the player wins a small hit, the player can be given a sense of expectation for winning the 2R short open latent big hit.

(4-3. Game state after the end of the game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the gaming state to be transferred after each winning game will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state that shifts after each winning game.

(Game state after 4-3-1.15R probable big hit game ends)
After the 15R-probability big hit game, as shown in the figure, regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning, it is shifted to the “probable change state”. In this “probable change state”, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of special symbol variation display operations (hereinafter abbreviated as “special symbol variation frequency”) is a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, The total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the total variation number of the special symbols 1 and 2) (the same applies hereinafter): for example 70 times) The jackpot is determined until the game ends or within the predetermined number of times ( When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a big hit and the occurrence of the big hit game is confirmed. (It may be the case that the big hit is won. The same applies hereinafter) The probability variation state continues until the predetermined number of times. When the special symbol variation display game is finished without confirming the big hit, the probability variation state is terminated, and the next game is shifted to “normal A (internal game state is normal game state)”. There. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a special symbol variation display game that has been completed a predetermined number of times without winning a big hit (excluding the small hits) after being shifted to a gaming state in which the big win lottery probability is at least high. This is a probability-variation machine (number-of-times probability variation machine (ST machine)) that terminates the high probability state and shifts the jackpot lottery probability to a low probability. Hereinafter, the upper limit number of the special symbol variation display game (special symbol variation number) in which the high probability state is continued is referred to as “specified ST number” as necessary.

(4-3-2.10R probable big hit game state after game end)
After the 15R probability variable big hit game, the game state is shifted to the “probability changed state” regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit, and the game state transition after this probability changed state is the same as in the case of the 15R probability variable big hit described above.

(4-3-3.2R gaming state after the end of the game with a big hit probability)
After the 2R latency big hit game, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of the big hit win. Specifically, when the game state is “normal A” to “normal C” at the time of winning the big hit (when the internal game state is the normal game state or the latent state), “normal C (internal game state) Is in the “probability state”), if it is “probability change state”, it is shifted to “probability change state”. The “normal C” here is managed as the same gaming state as the “normal C” in which the internal gaming state is the normal gaming state as described above, but the substance is that the internal gaming state is in the latent state. “Normal C (latency)”.

  When the game becomes “normal C” after the 2R latent big hit game ends, the big hit is made until the special symbol variation display game is finished for the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) or within the predetermined number of times. The “normal C” continues until it is confirmed, and when the special symbol variation display game is finished without confirming the big win within the predetermined number of times, the “normal C” is ended, and the next game is changed to “normal A”. To be migrated. That is, when the specified number of STs is divided into the first half section and the second half section, the first half section is placed under “normal C” and the second half section is placed under “normal A”. Therefore, when the transition is made from “normal C” to “normal A”, the internal gaming state is shifted to “normal A” in the latent state.

  The number of executions of the special symbol variation display game including “normal C” in the first half section after the above-described latent state becomes “normal A” or until the end of the specified ST number (70 times), or “Normal A” continues until the big hit (including small hits) is confirmed within the specified number of STs, and the special symbol variation display game is terminated without the big hit (including small hits) being determined within the specified number of STs. Sometimes, the high probability state ends, and the next game shifts to “normal A” in the normal game state. In other words, after the “normal C” is reached after the 2R latent big hit game ends, if the big win is not won within the specified number of STs (for example, 70 times), the internal game state is “normal C” in the latent state. (Special symbol variation display game execution count 30 times) ”→“ Normal A (special symbol variation display game execution count 40 times) ”in the same state (ST specified number of times completed) → Internal game state is“ normal game state ” Game state transition such as “A”.

  As described above, the “15R long open probability change big hit” is transferred to the first big hit game, and after the first big hit game is finished, the first privilege that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state. It functions as a “first jackpot” for shifting to the gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state). In addition, the above “10R long open probability change big hit” is the second big hit in which the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening is controlled so that the profit provided to the player is relatively less than the first big hit game. It shifts to a game, and functions as a “second jackpot” that shifts to the first bonus game state after the end of the second jackpot game. In addition, the above “2R short-opening latent big hit” is a third game in which the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening is controlled so that the profit provided to the player is relatively less than the first big hit game. The second bonus game state (in this embodiment, “latency probability”) is transferred to the jackpot game, and the profit provided to the player is relatively less than the first bonus game state after the end of the third jackpot game. It functions as a “third jackpot” for shifting to the state “).

  In this embodiment, the “short-time state” is not generated even if any big hit is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fourth big hit (short-time big hit) that generates the short-time state after the big-hit game ends. ) May be provided. In this case, the condition for ending the short-time state is that the special symbol variation display game is executed until the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) ends or until the big hit is confirmed or won within the predetermined number of times. can do. In this embodiment, at least when the game is shifted to the high probability state, the special symbol variation display game is executed until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (the number of specified STs), or the big hit is confirmed or won in the predetermined number of times. It was explained that the high probability state continues until However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a fifth jackpot may be provided that continues the high probability state until the next jackpot is confirmed or won regardless of the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game. The contents (game form) of the big hit game by the fourth big hit or the fifth big hit described above may be the same as or different from the contents of the first to third big hit games. There may be one or more types of jackpots that trigger the transition to the “probability change state”, “latent probability state”, or “short-time state”.

(4-4. Game state after the small hit game)
Next, the gaming state after the small hit game will be described. Here, after the small hit game, the internal game state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is. That is, the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small win is not performed. For this reason, both the internal game state at the time of winning the small hit and the internal game state after the small hit game are the same internal game state. This is different from “big hit” in which the transition control of the internal gaming state can be performed. However, in this embodiment, the transition control of the “internal gaming state” due to the small win is not performed, while the transition control of the “gaming state” is performed. Thereby, for example, when the game state after the small hit game and the game state after the 2R latent large hit game are shifted to the same game state, it is possible to stay in the effect mode in which both perform the same effect. That is, even after the small hit game, it is possible to generate an effect under the same effect mode as after the 2R latent large hit game. As a result, the player can be given a sense of rushing into a high-probability state that the player may win the 2R short-release latent big hit and move to the “latent state”. ing. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 4, the game state after each small hit game when the small hit A to small hit C is won will be described in detail.

(4-4-1. Game state after the small hit game when the small hit A is won)
After the small hit game by the small hit A, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination varies depending on the game state at the time of the big hit win. Specifically, when the game state is “normal A” to “normal C” at the time of winning the big hit, it is transferred to “normal B”, and when it is “probability change state”, it is transferred to “probability change state”. It is like that. When the “normal B” is reached, the “normal B” continues until the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times. However, when the special symbol variation display game is completed without determining the big hit within the predetermined number of times, the “normal B” is ended and the next game is shifted to “normal A”.

(4-4-2. Game state after the small hit game when winning the small hit B)
After the small hit game by the small hit B, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of the big hit win. Specifically, when the game state is “normal A” to “normal C” at the time of winning the big hit, it is transferred to “normal B”, and when it is “probability change state”, it is transferred to “probability change state”. It is like that. In the case of “normal C” due to the small hit B, until the special symbol variation display game ends for the second predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) or until the big hit is confirmed within the predetermined number of times. When the “normal C” continues and the special symbol variation display game is finished without the big hit being determined within the predetermined number of times, the “normal C” is ended and the next game is shifted to “normal A”. It is like that.

(4-4-3. Game state after the end of the small hit game when winning the small hit C)
After the small hit game by the small hit C, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of the big hit win. Specifically, the game state “normal A” to “normal C” at the time of winning the big hit is transferred to “normal C”, and when it is “probability change state”, the game state is changed to “probability change state”. It is like that. In the case of “normal C” due to the small hit C, the special symbol variation display game is played for the third predetermined number of times (preferably, “the second predetermined number of times <the third predetermined number of times” and “the first predetermined number of times”). Number of times satisfying at least one of the relationship of “predetermined number of times = third predetermined number of times” (in this embodiment, for example, 30 times) until the end or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times “C” continues, and when the special symbol variation display game ends without the big win being determined within the predetermined number of times, the “normal C” ends, and the next game is shifted to “normal A”. ing. Accordingly, the “normal C” transferred due to the above-mentioned small hit C winning and the “normal C” transferred due to the above small hit B winning are in the same gaming state. However, the stay period of “Normal C” ends in 30 special symbol fluctuation display games (“Normal C (30 times)” in the figure) or 15 times (“Normal C (15 in the figure)”) Times))).

  Here, the above-mentioned “normal C” is a gaming state that can be shifted to even after the 2R latent probability winning game is over. For this reason, when the mode is shifted to “Normal C” due to the 2R short open latency big win, small B win, or small C win, each of the production modes (“Normal C”) is produced. Will be in the “normal C effect mode” described later), and whether or not the internal game state is the “latency state” in the effect, that is, whether the jackpot winning probability state is a high probability state or a low probability state It is concealed. In this embodiment, although there is a difference in the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function between the normal gaming state and the latent probability state, it is noted that the mechanical gaming operation state that appears on the appearance is the same state (both are ' By preventing the player from perceiving what kind of gaming state from the stage of production, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a high probability state. Yes. In particular, if the special symbol variation display game is ended 15 times without winning a big win or a small win, and the next game also stays in a production mode corresponding to “normal C”, the small win C win is won. Or because it is limited to whether or not 2R short open latent big hit is won, the expectation that “normal C (30 times)” may have entered a higher probability state than “normal C (15 times)” Will increase further.

  Even in the case of transition from “normal C” to “normal A”, in order to leave the player with a high probability state expectation, the “normal C” continuation count is less than the specified ST count. Preferably there is. Further, according to the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of variations of the special symbol), not only the transition from the “normal C” to the “normal A” but also the special symbol variation display game while staying in the “normal C”. After the predetermined number of executions have been completed, a predetermined transition lottery is performed each time the special symbol variation display game is executed. If the transition lottery is won, the transition from “normal C” to “normal A” Also good. For example, if 2R short open latency probability change big hit or small hit C is won, after the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), the transition lottery is performed, and if small hit B is won, the second predetermined number of times After finishing (for example, 15 times), the above-mentioned transfer lottery is performed. Furthermore, it is preferable to forcibly shift to “normal A” when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning the transition lottery until the specified number of STs ends.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, an effect mode (effect state) corresponding to each gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with an effect mode that produces an effect related to the current gaming state, and is configured to be able to go back and forth between the effect modes. Specifically, during the “normal A” stay, a “normal A effect mode” that produces an effect related to this, while during a “normal B” stay, a “normal B effect mode” that produces an effect related thereto, A “normal C effect mode” that produces an effect related to this during the “normal C” stay, and a “probable change effect mode” that produces an effect related to this during the “probable change state”. There are various types of performance modes. In addition, the “normal C effect mode” corresponding to the “normal C” is an effect in which the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is concealed and the player is given an expectation of a high probability state. Plays the role of “secret mode”.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) that controls the transition of the effect mode, and a specific effect control command (game state designation command) sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201). ), It is configured such that transition control between these effect modes is possible in a form that maintains consistency with the gaming state managed on the main control unit 20 side.

  Also, in each effect mode, the background display as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative symbol is, for example, “normal” so that the player can understand what kind of game state the player is staying in. Under the “A production mode”, a background production reminiscent of the season “spring” (for example, a background production in which a background image of a cherry tree is displayed: the first background production), and under the “normal B production mode”, the season “summer” is associated. Background effect (for example, background effect for displaying a background image of the sea: second background effect), under the “normal C effect mode”, a background effect reminiscent of the season “autumn” (for example, a background image of an autumnal tree) Displayed background effect: 3rd background effect) Under “Probability change effect mode”, a background effect reminiscent of the season 'winter' (for example, a background effect displaying a snowy mountain background image: a fourth background effect) Is Toggles control.

  Note that the “normal C effect mode” of the present embodiment is the same effect mode regardless of whether the internal game state is the latent state (high probability state) or the normal game state (low probability state). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, a “variation pattern designation command” or “decoration pattern designation command” including internal game state information, or a “game state designation” including only internal game state information. By transmitting the “command”, the “genuine normal C performance mode (first secret performance mode)” under the latent state (high probability state) and the normal gaming state (low probability state) according to the jackpot lottery probability ) The transition control to the “Gasse normal C effect mode (second secret effect mode)” below may be possible. In this configuration, when the internal game state is in the normal game state and the normal game state is maintained by winning the small hit B or the small hit C, the “normal C effect mode” above “ When the game mode is shifted to the “genuine C effect mode” and the internal game state is won in the 2R short open latency large hit during the normal game state or the latent state, It is possible to shift to the “normal C effect mode”. Then, while making both background effects the same (for example, a background effect reminiscent of the season 'Autumn'), the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is kept secret, for example, the “Gase's normal C effect” The “genuine normal C effect mode” is currently higher than the “mode” by increasing the probability of occurrence of a specific effect (implying that there is a possibility of a latent state and implying a latent expectation effect to be implied). A player can be given an inference element as to whether or not the player is in a probability state. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved further.

(5-2. Advance notice)
Next, the notice effect will be described. During the symbol variation display game, various notice effects related to the above-described effect mode can be generated. Such effects include “button notice effect”, “prefetching notice effect”, etc., in addition to the notice effect such as “reach effect” and “pseudo-ream”. These performance modes serve as “scoring effects” for raising the player's expectation of winning a big hit.

(5-2-1. Reach Production)
The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode that accompanies the reach state, and specifically refers to an effect mode that displays the final result via the reach state. This “reach state” means that some of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in the middle of the decorative symbol variation display game will generate a big hit (winning win) before the result of the decorative symbol variation display game is derived. It is a display mode in which a decorative pattern that has not yet been derived and displayed is displayed in a state that constitutes a part of the display mode to be displayed, in other words, a display mode that indicates the occurrence of jackpot is easy to be derived Is a variable display mode that can be associated with the player. For example, when the combination of decorative symbols indicating the occurrence of a big hit (winning winning) is “7 (left symbol)”, “7 (middle symbol)”, and “7 (right symbol)”, the decorative symbol is displayed on a predetermined hit effective line. Is a part of the display mode indicating that the jackpot is generated (winning winning) (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol indicate “7”, so-called “listening state (reach symbol)) However, a display mode in which the finally derived result does not necessarily indicate the occurrence of jackpot, for example, “7 (left symbol)”, “7 (middle symbol)”, “7 (right symbol)” is derived. However, a decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed (here, a middle symbol that does not form a hearing state (reach symbol)) is stopped, rocked, enlarged, reduced, or deformed continuously for a predetermined period of time. However, in the stage before the final result is displayed, It refers to the state or the state in which the possibility of the occurrence is continuing. Therefore, even if the reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol variation display game does not necessarily become “big hit”, but the finally derived result shows a stop display mode (for example, “7 (Left symbol) "" 7 (middle symbol) "" 7 (right symbol) "), the game result of this time is" lost ".

  The above “reach effect” suggests a jackpot winning expectation indicating the degree of expectation of whether or not a big win has been won, and includes a plurality of types of reach effects associated with the big win winning expectation. For example, when a specific reach state appears, there is a case where the big hit winning expectation is relatively higher than when a normal reach state ('normal reach (N reach)') appears. Such reach production with a specific reach state is referred to as 'super reach (SP reach)'. Many of these SP reaches have a longer production time (variation time) than the N reach in order to increase the expectation of a big hit. In addition, in the above reach production, in addition to N reach and SP reach via the reach state, it is assumed that the non-reach effect (so-called “normal fluctuation”) that does not go through the reach state, and finally derived results ( Reach effect (sudden hit reach effect) that strikes the player's intention, such as a combination of decorative symbols) is a stop display mode showing a big hit, a predetermined variation time through or without going through the reach state In addition, it is possible to include a premium reach effect (full-reach reach effect) such as performing a variable display while maintaining the display mode showing the big hit and notifying the big hit winning decision.

  The reach effects of this embodiment are provided with the following types of reach effects. First, reach production can be broadly classified as “N-reach, weak SP reach A, weak SP reach B, strong SP reach A, and strong SP reach B” for “normal A” or “normal B”. "Special reach" type dedicated to "definite change", "reach during probability change" type dedicated to "probability change state", and the like. These reach production types include one or more types of variation patterns. For example, “weak SP reach A type” is “weak SP reach A1 to A3”, “weak SP reach B type” is “weak SP reach B1 to B3”, and “strong SP reach A type” is “strong”. SP Reach A1 to A3 ',' Strong SP Reach B Type 'is' Strong SP Reach B1 to B3', 'Special Reach' Type is' Special Reach 1 to 3 ', and' Probably Reaching Reach 'Type Includes 'probability reach 1-3'.

  The expectation degree for winning a big hit in the reach effect varies mainly depending on the selection rate of the reach effect and the gaming state. For example, the probability of winning a big hit is high because of the relationship of “N reach <weak SP reach A <weak SP reach B <strong SP reach A <strong SP reach B” between different reach types. The larger the number, such as weak SP reach A1 <weak SP reach A2 <weak SP reach A3, the higher the big win winning expectation. Note that the actual degree of big hit winning expectation varies depending on whether other notice effects are involved. For this reason, for example, even when the weak SP reach appears, if a notice effect with a high expectation level for winning a big hit is involved, the expected degree of winning a big win can be the same as the strong SP reach.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-ream production (pseudo-ream))
“Pseudo-ream” refers to an effect that involves a quasi-continuous variation display state (pseudo variation) of a decorative symbol. Specifically, part or all of a decorative symbol is temporarily suspended during a decorative symbol variation display game. By repeating the display operation such as executing the decorative symbol re-variation operation from the temporarily stopped state once or multiple times, it seems that the variable operation to be set as a set is executed multiple times. This refers to a variable display mode as expressed. When performing this pseudo-variation, re-variation operation is performed after a temporary stop state with a combination of symbols that are temporarily lost while forming a reach symbol, or a special decorative symbol (the occurrence of a pseudo-ream) is replaced with a normal decorative symbol. By including a special decorative design (pseudo continuous activation chance design) that suggests the possibility and performing a re-variation operation after a temporary stop state, including a special decorative design, In some cases, the player may be informed that a pseudo-variation is or is likely to be made. This “pseudo-run” is mainly generated before the reach state is formed, and when a part or all of the stop symbols constituting the combination of stop symbols in the temporary stop state are formed in the reach state A pseudo-variation operation is performed while suggesting that there is a possibility that a combination of reach symbols may be configured, and after the pseudo-variation is completed, a final game result is derived via the reach state. . That is, the “pseudo-ream” is mainly used as a notice effect that informs that there is a possibility that a reach effect may occur. For example, the expectation level (reach occurrence) that N reach or SP reach occurs according to the number of pseudo reams This is one aspect of the production of swearing that suggests the degree of expectation) and instigates the expectation of winning a big hit. However, the final game result may be derived without going through the reach state after the pseudo variation is completed. In other words, in the production mode involving pseudo-reams, 'pseudo-ream production with' pseudo-ream production 'and' pseudo-ream + non-reach production (normal fluctuation) 'with non-ream production with pseudo-ream (Normal fluctuation with pseudo-ream) 'is included. Here, the fluctuation display developed after the pseudo fluctuation is completed is also referred to as “main fluctuation”. For example, in the case of going through the reach state, the reach state is formed by the main fluctuation and the final game result is obtained. Will be derived. In the case of the production mode accompanied by the pseudo-ream and the reach production, different production modes of “pseudo-run” and “reach production” are combined. Unless otherwise required in the book, reach production with pseudo-ream is treated in the same way as “reach production”.

(5-2-3. Button notice effect)
The “button notice effect” refers to an effect mode in which the content of the effect can be changed depending on whether or not the player has operated the frame effect button 13, and the so-called “player participation type” effect mode. Say. In the “button notice effect”, information for prompting the player to operate the frame effect button 13 is notified during a predetermined operation reception period, and whether or not the frame effect button 13 is operated at this time. Depending on whether or not, the subsequent production changes, for example, the appearance of the character currently appearing or the occurrence of a special sound effect may indicate the expectation of winning a big hit It can be done. Such a “player-participation-type” performance mode can give the player a feeling as if he / she has influenced the game result, so that the fun of the game can be increased.

(5-3. Pre-reading notice effect)
In addition, it is indicated in advance that there is a possibility of winning a big hit for an operation holding ball that has not yet been provided for execution of the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). There is a pre-reading notice effect to inform. Regarding the pre-reading notice effect, first, in the main control unit 20, when an operation holding ball is generated (at the time of winning a prize), a big hit lottery related to the operation holding ball (on condition that the execution start condition of the symbol variation display game is established) “Lookup lottery at the start of change”: pre-fetched jackpot lottery that determines in advance what will be the result of S409 in FIG. (Refer to “prefetch big hit determination (winning lottery lottery at the time of winning)” executed on condition that the operation holding ball is generated and the start condition is satisfied) (see S319 in FIG. 10 and S339 (random number determination processing) in FIG. 11)) Is called.

  Furthermore, by using the pre-fetched lottery lottery result, it is possible to pre-determine in advance what kind of variation pattern the special symbol will have when the activated ball is subjected to the variation display operation. Selection lottery (referred to as “prefetch variation pattern” hereinafter) (refer to prefetch variation pattern determination: S323 in FIG. 10, S343 in FIG. 11 (random determination process at start-up winning prize))). In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, for example, a reach variation pattern for specifying a reach effect via a reach state (hereinafter referred to as “variable pattern with reach”) or a non-reach effect that does not involve a reach state It is determined in advance whether a normal variation pattern for designation (hereinafter referred to as “normal variation pattern”) is obtained. Since the prefetch variation pattern is determined using at least the winning lottery result, the prefetch variation pattern information transmitted to the production control unit 24 side includes not only the variation pattern type but also the variation pattern at the start of variation. In addition, information on whether it is a “hit fluctuation pattern” at the time of winning a big hit (including a small hit) or a “losing fluctuation pattern” at the time of winning a loss can also be included. When information on the result of the pre-reading determination (hereinafter referred to as “pre-reading determination”), that is, pre-reading variation pattern information is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 relates to the pre-reading notice effect. An effect control process is performed.

  Specifically, when the “hold addition command” including the information of the prefetch determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 and the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, the prefetch determination included in the command is performed. An effect control process related to the pre-reading notice effect based on the content of the result is performed. However, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect by lottery, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect can be executed, the symbol variation display that is performed at the timing when the operation holding ball is generated or first. At the same time as the start of the game or at a predetermined timing during the game, a pre-reading notice effect for the current operation holding ball is displayed.

  Note that the “look-ahead variation pattern” obtained by the pre-reading determination at the time of the operation holding ball occurrence is not necessarily the “variation pattern at the start of the variation” itself obtained when the operation holding ball is actually subjected to the variation display operation. There is no. For example, the presence / absence of reach production will be described as a representative example in which the variation pattern at the start of variation is a variation pattern designating “strong SP reach A1”. In this case, the look-ahead variation pattern is not the type of reach production of “strong SP reach A1”, but the “strong SP reach A” type, which is the essence of the variation pattern at the start of the variation. It is specified that it is a “strong SP reach A type” in which fluctuation patterns (strong SP reach A1 to A3) of the same system called “strong SP reach A” are grouped. Therefore, the main information notified by the pre-reading notice effect is that the probability of winning a big hit is high or low, in other words, the expectation of winning a big hit is relatively high with respect to a symbol variation display game to be executed in the future. It is information on whether the possibility of production is high or low, and such information is notified to the player in advance before the operation holding ball is digested, so that only the symbol variation display game of this time In addition, the interest of the player is also improved for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future, and the fun of the game is improved.

(5-3-1. Pre-reading notice effect mode: FIGS. 5 and 6)
Next, referring to FIG. 5 and FIG. 5 and 6 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the prefetching notice effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and show an example of the prefetching notice effect.

  First, referring to FIG. 5, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation holding ball on the special symbol 1 side is partly in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the drawing, below the display area of the decorative symbol). A holding display area 76 for displaying the number and a holding display area 77 for displaying the number of the operation holding balls on the special symbol 2 side are provided. : “○ (white circle mark)” in the figure)) or in the light-off state (no operation hold ball: circle in the broken line in the figure), information on the current number of the operation hold balls is notified (see FIG. 5 (A)). .

  The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation holding ball (hereinafter referred to as “holding display”) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and a maximum of four holding displays can be displayed in each holding display area 76, 77. (See FIG. 5 (b)). Specifically, in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost action hold ball is the action that occurred first (that is, the oldest) on the time axis among all the action hold balls in the hold display. Displayed as a holding ball. In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, on-hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) each including a hold icon (icon image) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 by the same number (four) as the maximum hold storage number. Special symbols 1 side), a2 to d2 (corresponds to special symbols 2 side). These hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 are normally switched to the operation state (lighted state) by the same number, for example, three, as the number of operation hold balls existing when the prefetch determination is made. Therefore, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of hold operations. However, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined prefetch notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode). As a result, this works as a means for generating a pre-reading notice effect.

  When receiving the hold addition command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 performs a pre-reading notice lottery for drawing whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is performed as part of the display control process related to the hold display. Do. In this pre-reading notice lottery, the action-holding ball related to the winning becomes the action-holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (for example, the hold display portion b2 that is hatched in FIG. 5 (a) corresponds). In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice lottery execution condition is based on the condition that there is no reach variation pattern type in the pre-reading variation pattern related to the existing operation holding ball. This is in order to avoid the fact that other reach effects intervene in the middle of the pre-reading notice effects that are continuously generated, the original look-ahead notice effects are cut off, and the effect of the effects becomes dilute. . The winning probability of the above-mentioned pre-reading notice lottery is higher than that of “losing”, and the probability of winning a hit type with a relatively high expectation degree of winning big wins is higher. Depending on whether or not to do, winning expectation degree to the big hit is shown.

  When the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons of the holding display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the holding icon targeted for the prefetching notice is notified from, for example, the blue color of the normal holding display. A “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is performed in which the display changes to a special holding color such as yellow, green, red, or rainbow. Here, the blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors on the hold icon mean that the winning expectation is high in the order of these colors. (Accurate) This is a premium hold icon. This reserved color is determined by lottery based on the contents of the prefetch fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the “big hit” is more likely to be selected than the “losing”, and if the reach type has a relatively high expectation degree for winning the big hit, the reserved color having the higher expected degree of winning the big hit is selected with a high probability. It has become. Note that the pre-reading notice effect mode of the “holding display changing system” is not limited to changing the holding color as described above, but may be changed to an icon imitating a special character. Such “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is displayed when an operation holding ball is generated, and is therefore referred to as a “winning change system” pre-reading notice effect.

  Here, the existing operation holding balls are digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, in order to express that one operation hold ball has been consumed, the display position of the hold display portion corresponding to the existing operation hold ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the display number is reduced. Although the control is performed, the above-described hold display mode different from normal continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the above-described hold display change system (change system at the time of winning) is an aspect of “continuous notice effect” in which a dedicated notice effect is displayed across a plurality of special symbol variation display games. It can be said that there is.

  In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect, the “variation start changing system” pre-reading notice effect that is triggered by the start of the symbol variation display game can be displayed. It has become. The “change start time change system” pre-reading notice effect is, for example, displaying a pre-reading-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, which is executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuation display games and continuously displayed. This is a pre-reading notice effect of “image display change system”. In other words, the pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system” is a symbol variation display game related to establishment of a start condition when a game ball wins a start opening and a start condition is satisfied during one symbol change display game. The right to execute is temporarily stored, and a pre-reading notice lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a pre-reading notice effect is to be performed. Make the variable display game an expression with some relevance. For example, in all the symbol variation display games related to the existing operation hold ball from the oldest operation hold ball to the pre-read notification target operation hold ball in the storage order, a pre-read-only notice image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. . In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the “variation start change system” is the same as the “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect. It can be said that this is one aspect of the “notice effect”.

  In addition, the execution form of the pre-reading notice effect can be set to the following form. (B) Run only the winning change system (holding display changing system), (b) Run only the change start changing system (image display changing system), (c) Winning change system (holding display changing system) And a change start time change system (image display change system), or one or a combination of these may be used. Therefore, even if the “previous change system” look-ahead notice effect appears, the “variation start change system” look-ahead notice effect does not necessarily appear, and vice versa. Even when the “system prefetching notice effect” appears, the “change system upon winning” may not necessarily appear. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect of “change system at winning (holding display changing system)” and the pre-reading notice effect of “change system at start of change (image display changing system)” can be generated simultaneously. What kind of execution mode is used can be determined as appropriate.

  Also, during execution of the pre-reading notice effect of the winning change system (holding display change system) and / or (at least one of the meanings) during the change start time changing system (image display change system) Independently, a movable body accessory (not shown) may be operated in an operation pattern dedicated to prefetching. In the same way as the “previous change system at the start of change” and “previous change system at the time of winning”, the effect by this movable body accessory also appears as a special notice effect across multiple special symbol change display games. It can be said that it is an aspect of “continuous notice effect”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the pre-reading notice effect mode woven by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In the figure (1), during the symbol variation display game (“↓” in the figure indicates that the ornamental symbol is being varied and displayed), the upper start opening 34 is won to win the special symbol 1 side operation holding ball. Suppose that the number has become three, and among the third, the action holding ball on which the second movement start operation is executed is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (in this case, the pre-reading notice lottery and change of the winning change system) This shows a case in which a winning change was made in the pre-change notice lottery at the start. In addition, here, it is assumed that the first operation hold ball previously held and the third operation hold ball held later are operation hold balls that have not been pre-selected for the pre-reading notice lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 1A, the production control unit 24 displays a hold display of the second operation hold ball that has been subject to the pre-read notice, and a hold display dedicated to pre-read that is different from normal (hereinafter, “dedicated hold display”). (Referred to as). At this time, the hold display corresponding to the first and third operation hold balls that are not subject to the pre-reading notice is maintained as a normal hold display (hereinafter referred to as “normal hold display”). In the figure, when the display mode of the hold display of the second operation hold ball subject to the pre-reading notice is changed from the normal hold display (white circle (◯) mark) to the dedicated hold display (hatched circle). Show. This notifies the player that the pre-reading notice effect has been started. FIG. 1 (1) shows that the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is finished and the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with “246” (the result is “lost”).

  The game progresses to (2) in the same figure, and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game based on the operation reservation ball on the special symbol 1 side which is the first (oldest operation reservation ball). The action control ball 24 digests the action hold ball, and the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each action hold ball to the left with the start of the special symbol variation display game. It is set as the hold display mode which shows the state digested by one, and the decoration symbol fluctuation display game based on the first operation hold ball is started. At this time, as a pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system”, a background image for the pre-reading notice effect (for example, a lightning effect produced by displaying a lightning image simulating lightning: a dedicated notice image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Display. Thereby, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 has a display mode as shown in FIG.

  Then, the game progresses to FIG. 3 (3), and the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is terminated and the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with “351” (the result is “lost”).

  Subsequently, the game progresses to FIG. 4 (4), and the main control unit 20 plays a special symbol variation display game based on the second operation holding ball, that is, the operation holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. The action control unit 24 starts and digests the operation hold ball, and at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation display game, the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left, respectively. The decorative symbol variation display game based on the actuated holding ball is started. At this time, the “dedicated hold display” of the change system at the time of winning disappears from the screen at the time of the shift, and is terminated when the current symbol variation display game is started (with the digestion of the operation hold ball). In addition, a special notice image (in this case, lightning effect) of the change system at the start of the change is ended at the end of the generation in the symbol change display game. FIG. 4 (4) shows the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game. In this way, a series of pre-reading notice effects has been completed. After that, if there is a roaring effect (pseudo-ream or reach effect (SP reach)) that increases the expectation of winning a big hit during this symbol change display game, the expectation for the big win is combined with the contents of the look-ahead notice effect. The feeling will be further enhanced.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate the pre-reading notice effect as described above as one aspect of the continuous notice effect. Thereby, since the variation of production can be made rich, the fun of the game can be improved.

  In addition, various effects by the pachinko gaming machine 1 are displayed by the rendering means provided in the gaming machine. Any directing means can be employed as the directing means in the present invention as long as it is a stimulus transmitting means that can appeal to human perception such as vision, hearing, and touch. Light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45, LED device, speaker 46, and liquid crystal display device 36, sound generating device, effect display device, or a vibrating device that transmits vibration to the operator's body, or a movable body having a visual effect An example of such a feature is a representative example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eye like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes an image-independent display device (for example, a 7-segment display). The term “image display device” refers mainly to a type that produces an effect by displaying an image, and a device that produces an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device. In addition, the operation of the frame effect button 13 (manual operation means) is not performed in a specific period (for example, a part or all of the period during which a roaring effect with a relatively high expectation degree for winning a big hit is occurring) , To prevent the frame effect button 13 from being pressed), or to provide special effect means placed in a difficult operation state (for example, making it difficult to press the frame effect button 13), or to vibrate the manual operation means. An exciting device may be provided.

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 7 to 22>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 7-22, the game operation process in the main control part 20 side of this embodiment is demonstrated. The main control unit 20 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (main control side main process: FIG. 7) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 8).

<6. Main process on the main control side: FIG. 7>
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control unit 20 side. The main process starts when the power is turned on without operating the initialization switch (not shown), such as when recovering from a power failure, and when the initialization switch is turned on. May turn on. In any case, when the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a voltage is supplied to each control board by the power supply board 31, and the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) starts the main control side main process shown in FIG. .

  In the main control side main process, the CPU 201 first executes a necessary initial setting process before the start of the gaming operation (step S011). For example, it first sets itself to the interrupt disabled state, sets to a predetermined interrupt mode (interrupt mode 2), and initializes the register values in the CPU including each part of the microcomputer.

  Next, the state (ON, OFF) of the RAM clear signal which is an output signal of the RAM clear switch input through an input port (not shown) is determined (step S012). Here, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize the entire area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the initialization switch operated by the store clerk of the pachinko parlor. doing.

  Here, assuming that the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, the determination result in step S012 is “YES”, and the entire area of the RAM is cleared to zero (step S016). Therefore, the value of the backup flag set at the time of power-off becomes zero together with other checksum values.

  Next, a “RAM clear display command” for notifying that the RAM area has been cleared to zero is transmitted as an initialization command to each control board (step S017). Then, for example, 30 seconds is stored in the RAM clear notification timer as a time for notifying that the RAM has been cleared (step S018).

  Next, the CTC that outputs an interrupt signal for starting the timer interrupt operation is initialized (step S019), and the CPU is set in an interrupt enabled state.

  Thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are repeated until an interrupt occurs, and various random number update processes are executed during that time (steps S020 to S022). In this various random number update processing (step S021), various random numbers used in special symbol variation display games and normal symbol variation display games (random numbers related to jackpot lotteries circulating through a predetermined numerical range by increment processing (used for symbol lottery) Random numbers used for changing the initial value (start value) of the random numbers for special symbol determination) and random numbers related to lottery per auxiliary (random numbers for determining per-subject winning lottery per auxiliary) The initial value random number for determination and the initial value random number for determination per auxiliary) and the random number for variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern are updated.

  In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as various random number counters used for the symbol lottery related to the big hit lottery, the supplementary lottery, or the variation pattern lottery, a counter for generating a special symbol determination random number counter initial value, a special symbol determination There are provided a random number counter, a counter for generating an initial value per auxiliary sub-counter, a random counter for determining auxiliary sub-unit, a random number 1 counter for variation pattern, a random number counter 2 for variation pattern, and the like. These counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. In the various random number update processing in step S021, two initial value generation counters for generating initial values of the special symbol determination random number counter and the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, a variation pattern random number 1 counter, and a variation pattern random number 2 The counter is updated to generate the above various soft random numbers. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the variation pattern random number 1 counter is 0 to 238, a value is acquired from the count value storage area for generating the value of the variation pattern random number 1 in the RAM 203, and 1 is acquired as the acquired value. After adding, it is stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 239, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters are updated in the same manner. The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes except during a timer interrupt process that is executed intermittently.

  Returning to the determination process in step S012, the description will be continued. At the time of recovery from the power failure state, the initialization switch (RAM clear signal) is in the OFF state (step S012: YES). In such a case, the backup flag value is determined following the determination process in step S012 (step S013). Note that the backup flag is set to the ON state (backup flag = 5AH ('** H' means any hexadecimal number) when the power is cut off), and the backup flag is set to the OFF state (backup The flag is reset to 00H).

  Therefore, when the power is turned on or when recovering from a power failure, the backup flag should normally be in the ON state. However, the backup flag is reset (OFF) if the predetermined processing is not completed before the power is cut off for some reason. Therefore, when the backup flag is in the OFF state (step S013: NO), the process proceeds to step S016 to return the operation of the gaming machine to the initial state.

  On the other hand, if the backup flag is in an ON state (step S013: YES), a checksum calculation for calculating a checksum value is executed. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. When the checksum value is calculated, the calculation result is compared with the stored value at the SUM address in the RAM 203 (step S014). The SUM address stores a checksum value obtained by the same checksum calculation when the power is turned off. The stored calculation result is maintained by a backup power source together with other data of the RAM 203. Therefore, originally, both should match according to the determination in step S014.

  However, if the checksum operation could not be executed when the power was turned off, or even if it can be executed, the data in the work area may be damaged before the checksum operation of the main process is executed. In such a case, the determination result in step S014 is inconsistent. If data corruption is detected due to a discrepancy between the determination results (step S014: NO), the process proceeds to step S016, RAM clear processing is executed, and the operating state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state. On the other hand, when the checksum value obtained by the checksum calculation matches the stored value at the SUM address (step S014: YES), the stack pointer before power shutdown is restored based on the backup data, and the processing at power shutdown is performed. The game restoration process necessary to start the game from the state is executed.

  When the game restoration process at step S015 is completed, the process proceeds to the process at step S019, the CTC is initialized and the CPU is set in the interrupt enabled state, and thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are set until an interrupt occurs. In the meantime, various random number update processes described above are executed (steps S020 to S022).

<7. Main control timer interrupt processing: Fig. 8>
Next, a timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control timer interruption process. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 4 ms) from the CTC, and interrupted and executed during execution of the main control side main process. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the address value (including data described in the address) when the CPU 201 reads / writes the main memory such as RAM and ROM, the result information obtained by the arithmetic processing on the program, etc. A process such as reading into and taking in a CPU built-in register is sometimes referred to as “acquisition”, and when the CPU 201 accesses a work area of the RAM and stores predetermined data is sometimes referred to as “storage”.

  In FIG. 8, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first saves the contents of the register in the stack area, and then performs a power supply abnormality check process for monitoring the power supply state from the power supply control board 31 (step S051). In this power abnormality check process, it is mainly monitored whether the power is normally supplied. Here, for example, when an abnormality such as a power interruption occurs, a backup process for storing predetermined game information in the RAM at the time of the power interruption is performed so that the game can be restored without any trouble when the power is restored.

  Next, a timer management process for managing a timer used for game operation control is performed (step S052). Timer values of various timers (for example, special symbol accessory operation timer described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are managed (updated) here.

  Next, input management processing is performed (step S053). In this input management process, information detected by various sensors provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the winning counter. Here, the detection information by the various sensors is output from winning detection switches such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the like. ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of the switch signal. Thereby, it is monitored for each interrupt whether or not a winning is detected (a winning has occurred) at each winning opening. The “winning counter” is a counter provided corresponding to each winning opening and counting the number of game balls (winning balls) won. In the present embodiment, in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, an upper start opening winning counter for the upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening winning counter for the lower starting opening 35, a normal symbol starting opening winning counter for the normal pattern starting opening 37, a large A prize winning counter for the prize winning opening 50 and a prize winning counter for the general winning opening 43 for the general winning opening 43 are provided. Further, in this input management process, it is also monitored whether or not there is an illegal prize based on whether or not the detection information from the prize detection switch has won a prize during a period in which the prize should be allowed. For example, when the lower starting port sensor 35a detects a game ball even when the movable wing piece 47 is not operating, or when the big prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball even when the big hit game is not being played. Assuming that this is an illegal prize, the prize detection information is invalidated, and a predetermined error process is performed in an error management process (step S055) described later to notify the outside of the invalidation.

  Next, random number management processing within a timer interrupt for periodically updating the random numbers related to each variable display game is performed (step S054). In this periodic random number update process, a special symbol determination random number or auxiliary per-subject determination random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt), and a process for changing the start value of the random number counter is performed each time the random number counter makes a round. For example, the value of the special symbol judgment random number counter is updated (added by +1) within a predetermined range, and the special symbol judgment random number counter initial value generation counter value is read each time the special symbol judgment random number counter makes one round. The value of the generation counter is stored in the special symbol determination random number counter. As a result, the start value of the special symbol determination random number counter is changed according to the value of the generation counter, so that the count value of the special symbol determination random number counter is random while the update cycle is constant.

  Next, an error management process for monitoring presence / absence of abnormality in the game operation state is performed (step S055). In this error management process, as an abnormality in the gaming operation state, for example, it is monitored whether or not a disconnection has occurred between the boards, or whether or not there is an illegal winning, and these operation abnormalities (errors) are detected. If it occurs, predetermined error processing corresponding to the error is performed. As the error processing, for example, the progress of a predetermined game operation (for example, a game ball paying-out operation or a game ball launching operation) is stopped, or an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. To notify that an error has occurred.

  Next, prize ball management processing is performed (step S056). In this prize ball management process, the data stored in the above input management process is grasped and the prize counter is checked. Control unit) 29. Upon receiving this payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation for the designated number of prize balls. As a result, the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning mouth (a predetermined number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning mouth × the number of winning balls corresponding to the value of the winning counter) is paid out. Yes.

  Next, normal symbol management processing is performed (step S057). In this normal symbol management process, a lottery per auxiliary in the normal symbol fluctuation display game is performed, and based on the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol and the stop display mode of the normal symbol are determined, or blinking is repeated every predetermined time. Create normal symbol data (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol variation), and if normal symbol is not varying, create data for stop display (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol stop display) Or The normal symbol management process functions as an auxiliary game lottery unit and a normal symbol display unit (normal symbol display control unit) for controlling the normal symbol variation display operation.

  Next, the ordinary electric accessory management process is performed (step S058). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the generation of an excitation signal for solenoid control for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a necessary for the generation of the ordinary electric game based on the lottery result of the auxiliary per lot in the normal symbol management process (step S057). And the data (solenoid control data) is set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a in a solenoid management process described later, whereby the operation of the movable blade piece 47 is controlled. Note that the ordinary electric accessory management process functions as an auxiliary hit control means.

  Next, special symbol management processing is performed (step S059). In this special symbol management process (hit determination means), the big symbol lottery in the special symbol variation display game is mainly performed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (prefetch variation pattern, variation pattern at the start of variation) based on the lottery result. And special stop symbols. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, special electric accessory management processing is performed (step S060). In this special electric utility management process, when the big hit lottery result is “big hit” or “small win”, a setting process necessary to execute and control the hit game corresponding to the win is performed. Details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, right notification information management processing is performed (step S061). In this right-handed notification information management process, when the game state in which the high base gaming state of “electric support is present” occurs (in this embodiment, the probability variation state), the “launching position guidance effect” that reports the right-handed instruction information. (Right-handed notification effect) "is displayed. The right-handed instruction information here is, for example, instruction information that prompts the normal symbol start opening 37 to win a prize, and specifically, is information that instructs to aim at the right flow path 3c as a launch position. Typically, an image prompting the player to “right-hand” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a character display of “right-hand”), or a sound effect (for example, “ Or “Right-handed” sound). The case where the right-handed information is notified is a case where it is presumed that the player accidentally targets the launch position on the left flow path 3b side in the state where the electric support is present. The case where a winning occurs at the upper start opening 34 or the case where no winning occurs at the normal symbol starting opening 37 even after a predetermined time elapses. In such a case, in this right-handed notification information management process, a “right-handed instruction command” for instructing execution of the firing position guidance effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command. The control unit 24 is configured to control the appearance of the launch position guidance effect.

  Next, LED management processing is performed (step S062). In this LED management process, display data is output to the normal symbol display device 39a and the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Thereby, the change display and stop display of a normal symbol and a special symbol are performed. It should be noted that the normal symbol display data created in the normal symbol management process in step S057 and the special symbol display data update process (step S309 in FIG. 9 described later) during the special symbol management process in step S059 Display data is output by this LED management process.

  Next, external terminal management processing is performed (step S063). In this external terminal management process, the operation state information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the frame external concentrated terminal board 21. The above-mentioned operation state information includes the fact that a big hit game has occurred (condition device has been activated), a small hit game has occurred, and that a symbol variation display game has been executed (the special symbol variation display game has started or ended) Information), information such as winning information (the effect of winning at the start opening or the big winning opening, and information on the number of winning balls).

  Next, solenoid management processing is performed (step S064). In this solenoid management process, an excitation signal output process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data created in the ordinary electric accessory management process in step S058, and a special electric accessory management process in step S060. Excitation signal output processing for the special winning opening solenoid 52c based on the solenoid control data is performed. Thereby, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b operate in a predetermined pattern, and the lower start opening 35 and the big winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

  After the processing of steps S051 to S064 is completed, the saved register contents are restored (register restoration processing) and set to the interrupt enabled state (step S065). Thus, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interruption, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interruption occurs.

(8. Special symbol management processing: Fig. 9)
Next, the special symbol management process (step S059) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process in step S059.

  In FIG. 9, the CPU 201 first performs a special figure 1 start port check process on the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then a special symbol on the special symbol 2 side (lower start port 35 side). 2. A starting port check process is performed (step S302).

  When the start opening check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hitting flag is determined (step S303). This “small hitting flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a small hit game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not being played.

  When the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), the state of the condition device operation flag is then determined (step S304). The “conditional device operation flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the big hit game is not being played.

  If the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, neither the small hit game nor the big hit game (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH), special In accordance with the symbol operation status (00H to 03H), processing related to the special symbol variation display operation is performed (step S305: special symbol operation status branching process). On the other hand, if the small hit game is being played (step S303: = 5 AH) or if the big hit game is being played (step S304: = 5 AH), the processing related to the variable symbol display operation of steps S306 to S308 is not performed. It progresses to the special symbol display data update process of step S309. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game, the special symbol variation display operation is not performed (the special symbol display state of the special symbol display device is displayed after the small hit or after the big hit) As it is). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S305, depending on which status value the special symbol operation status is “waiting (00H, 01H)”, “changing (02H)” or “confirming (03H)”. The processing corresponding to each is executed.

  Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is “standby (01H)”, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) is performed. When the special symbol variation status is “varying (02H)”, the special symbol variation is performed. If the middle process (step S307) is “under confirmation (03H)”, the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) is executed. With these processes, a variable display operation is realized with a special symbol variation start and variation stop as one set. Here, “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned “under confirmation” indicates that the special symbol has been changed and is stopped (confirmed) and is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). When the processes in steps S306 to S308 are completed, the process proceeds to a special symbol display data update process in step S309 described later.

  On the other hand, if the game is a small hit game (step S303: = 5 AH), or if the big hit game is being played (step S304: = 5 AH), the processing related to the special symbol variable display operation in steps S306 to S308 is performed. Instead, the process directly proceeds to the special symbol display data update process in step S309.

  In step S309, special symbol display data management processing is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. If it is fluctuating, special symbol data (special symbol) that repeats blinking every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). If the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blink display during special symbol stop display) is generated. The special symbol display data created here is output in the LED management process (step S062) of FIG. Thus, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S060 of FIG.

(8-1. Special Figure 1 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 10)
First, the special figure 1 starting port check process (step S301 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 1 starting port check process in step S301. This special figure 1 start opening check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and as a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variation display game 1, the operation holding ball Processing such as number addition processing, various random number storage processing, and pending addition command creation processing is performed.

  In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311).

  When the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of the operation holding balls (hereinafter referred to as “special drawing 1 operation holding balls”) according to the special symbol 1 is less than the maximum holding memory number (here, the upper limit of four). If no winning is detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited without doing anything.

  When the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is 4 or more (step S312: YES), the process proceeds to step S325 described later. (S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number (step S313), and the process proceeds to step S314.

  When the process proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used for the special symbol variation display game 1 relating to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired as game information (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the variation pattern random number 1, and the variation pattern random number 2 are acquired from the random number counter, and the acquired random number values are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. To do. This reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation holding ball (holding data). Until the variable display operation is performed (until the execution of the special symbol variable display game 1), it is held and stored in the order in which the start conditions are established (in order of winning). The reserved memory area includes a reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (a special symbol 1 reserved memory area which is a first reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1), and a special symbol 2 Is provided as a second reserved storage area corresponding to FIG. 2). These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of activated balls to be held: n = 4 in the present embodiment). (Holding storage order is stored in the order of holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area,..., Holding n−1 storage area, holding n storage area).

  Of the various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number, the variation pattern random number 1, and the variation pattern random number 2 are extracted from a random number counter that generates a random number in software corresponding to each. Since the random number values of these random number counters are updated randomly in the main process executed between the interrupt process and the interrupt process that occur intermittently in the count value storage areas corresponding to each provided in the RAM 203, The value is obtained as it is.

  On the other hand, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from a random number generation circuit that generates a random number by hardware (a jackpot determination random number counter for counting the jackpot determination random value: not shown). This random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing when a game ball detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 34a, and the count value is input to the microcomputer. It has become. This count value is stored as a jackpot determination random number value in a storage area for special jackpot determination random values in RAM 203 (a special electric accessory activation determination random number latch buffer) provided separately from the reserved storage area of RAM 203, The CPU 201 reads out and uses the jackpot determination random number value stored in the special electric accessory activation determination random number latch buffer at a necessary timing. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value at the time of winning is stored in the special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer and the reserved storage area. If not provided, it may be stored in the reserved storage area as it is, and the jackpot determination random number value in the corresponding reserved storage area may be read at a necessary timing.

  Next, pre-read prohibition data (EVENT: “01H” for prohibiting the pre-read determination as winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating a pending addition command (details will be described later) ”) Is acquired (step S315), and it is determined whether the“ special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition ”is satisfied (step S316). The “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 1 operation holding ball is not executed, and thereby the prefetch notice effect is not executed. (See step S316: YES processing route). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side is prohibited when the game state is accompanied by the “electric support state”, that is, when the internal game state is in the probabilistic state. As described above, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side when the game state is accompanied by the electric support state is as follows.

  The first reason is that when the player is placed under a “power support state” such as “probability change state”, the “high base game” in which the winning rate for the lower start opening 35 can be significantly improved as compared with the normal game state. State (in this embodiment, the win rate of the movable wing piece 47 is improved: in this embodiment, the winning probability per assist is 255/256). Therefore, the player sets the launch position on the normal symbol start port 37 side. When aiming (when aiming so that the game ball passes through the right-down flow path 3c), the number of the operation reservation balls according to the special symbol 2 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 operation reservation ball") is frequently Presumed to occur. On the other hand, when placed in a state without electrical support, the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 is low “low base gaming state (in this embodiment, the winning probability per assist is 1/256)” Further, due to the fall direction changing member such as a game nail, it is difficult for the game ball to be guided to the upper start opening 34 side, or it is configured not to be guided. When aiming at the launch position, it is a game that brings disadvantages. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not set the launch position so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b side during the electric support state, and the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 operation holding ball This is because if the pre-reading determination is performed one by one for the special FIG. 1 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate, there is a problem that the control burden increases.

  Also, as a second reason, in order to improve the fun of the game, when the look-ahead notice effect is varied, for example, a look-ahead notice effect related to the jackpot type (particularly, a look-ahead notice effect that can identify the selected jackpot type) This is because the following problem arises when it is possible to generate the error. In the present embodiment, when both the special figure 1 operation reservation ball and the special figure 2 operation reservation ball exist, the special figure 2 operation reservation ball is preferentially digested. Means) ”(see FIG. 15 showing details of a special symbol variation start process in step S306 described later). With this priority variation function, the special symbol variation display game 2 is executed more preferentially than the special symbol variation display game 1. For this reason, when placed in a state where there is an electric support, for example, only a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 operation holding ball currently occurs, If the player recognizes this, the lower start port 35 is intentionally stopped from launching the game ball. The special symbol variation display game 1 on the non-priority variation side is deliberately executed, so that it is possible to deliberately aim at the high profit jackpot, and from the viewpoint of technical intervention problem Is not preferable.

  In addition, as an example of the problem of technical intervention, there is currently only a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 action holding ball, and the content at this time is “relatively low profit among big hits” If the player is aware of the winning of a big hit (for example, 2R short-opening latent big hit), if the player recognizes this, a special figure on the priority fluctuation side will be provided so as not to interrupt the special figure 2 operation holding ball. By continuously executing the symbol variation display game 2, the game can be advanced while receiving the maximum benefit of the big win lottery on the special symbol 2 side (special symbol variation display game 2 side). Specifically, the special symbol 2 side of the big hit lottery excludes low profit 2 "short open latent big hit" and "small hit" among the big hit types, and high profit "10R long open positive change big hit" Or “15R long opening probability change big hit” is a lottery target. For this reason, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the big win lottery on the special symbol 2 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 2 side) than to receive the big hit lottery on the special symbol 1 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 1 side). It is said to be expanded. Use this to maximize the benefits of the jackpot lottery on the special symbol 2 side until the end of the power support state (until the end of the specified number of STs), if the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 action holding ball is known After receiving, the problem of technical intervention, such as digesting the special figure 1 action holding ball related to the winning and easily obtaining a big hit, will cause inequality among players.

  In the present embodiment, in view of the above-described problems, a section (prefetch prohibition state) in which prefetch determination on the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side is prohibited is configured to be switchable according to the gaming state. . Specifically, the main control unit 20 prohibits the prefetch determination by the first prefetch determination means (for example, the prefetch determination processing on the special figure 1 side: S317 to S323 in FIG. For example, a prefetch determination process on the special figure 2 side: S337 to S343 in FIG. 11 (to be described later) that permits a prefetch determination (for example, in a state where there is an electric support: in the “probable change state”) And the second prefetch prohibition state in which the prefetch determination by the second prefetch determination means is prohibited and the prefetch determination by the first prefetch determination means is allowed (for example, in the state without electric support: “Normal A” ”To“ Normal C ”), and a function unit as prefetch prohibition state control means for switching control based on a predetermined switching condition. The prefetching prohibition state control means switches to a third prefetching prohibition state in which prefetching judgment by the first prefetching judgment means and the second prefetching judgment means is completely prohibited based on a predetermined condition. Prohibiting means can be provided. Examples of the “predetermined condition” include a case where a big hit game or a small hit game is being played. This is because, during a winning game, the special symbol change display operation is not performed even when the operation holding ball is generated, and therefore it is not necessary to perform the pre-reading notice effect. Also, there are cases where the big hit lottery probability fluctuates before and after the hit game due to the big hit (excluding the small hit) (in the big hit game of this embodiment, regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit win, it temporarily shifts to the low probability state. (See S475 in FIG. 21A described later). In this case, an operation holding ball is generated during a big hit game, and if a prefetch determination is made for this, a win determination is made in a low probability state at the time of prefetch determination, and a win determination is made in a high probability state at the start of fluctuation. This is because a situation occurs and the processing related to the prefetch determination becomes complicated. However, as in this embodiment, if a big win is won, a gaming machine that always shifts to a high probability state after the big hit game is finished will make a winning decision assuming a high probability state in the pre-reading determination, and the big hit game You may comprise so that pre-reading determination can be performed for the operation hold ball generated inside.

  Returning to the description of step S316 again, if the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the processing related to the prefetch determination (steps S317 to S324) is not performed, and the processing of step S325 is performed. move on.

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), the process proceeds to step S317, and a random number determination table for special figure 1 (see FIG. 29) is acquired (step S317). The random value for jackpot determination stored in (the special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer) is acquired (step S318), and the random number determination process of step S319 is performed. In this random number determination process, the “winning lottery” relating to the special symbol variation display game (here, the special symbol variation display game 1) is determined in advance. Details of the random number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the random number determination process in step S319 is completed, the special symbol 1 design table selection table (see FIG. 30) is acquired (step S320), and the special symbol determination random number stored in the RAM 203 is acquired (step S320). S321), the special stop symbol data creation process of step S322 is performed. In this special stop symbol data creation process, the “symbol lottery” relating to the special symbol variation display game (here, the special symbol variation display game 1) is determined in advance. Details of the special stop symbol data creation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S322 is completed, the start opening winning random number determination process in step S323 is then performed. In this starting point winning random number determination process, based on the data (special symbol determination data and variation pattern selection offset) obtained in the stop symbol data generation process of step S322, a prize used for generating a hold addition command to be described later. Command data (second byte: lower byte (EVENT)) is created. Details of the start opening winning random number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the random number determination process at the start opening winning in step S323 is completed, the winning command data on the upper byte (MODE) side that specifies the number of balls to be held at the time of the prefetch determination, and the lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the prefetch variation pattern A “hold addition command” composed of the winning command data is created (steps S324 to S325), and is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 without being stored in the RAM 203 (step S326). Details of the “hold addition command” will be described later with reference to FIG. As a result, the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start opening check process in step S302 of FIG. 11 is performed.

(8-2. Special Figure 2 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 11)
Next, the special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 2 starting port check process.

  The special figure 2 starting port check process, like the special figure 1 starting port check process, serves as a winning process executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition. Here, the special symbol variation display game 2 In the same way as the flow of the special figure 1 start port check process described above, as the pre-start process for executing the process, the addition process of the number of suspended balls for operation, the process of storing various random numbers, the process of creating a pending addition command, etc. Processing is performed. Hereinafter, the same processing contents as those in the special figure 1 start-up port check process (step S301) will be described by omitting them appropriately in order to avoid duplication.

  In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331).

  If no winning detection is detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331: NO), the special figure 2 start opening check process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, when the winning of the lower start opening 35 is detected (step S331: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 4 or more (step S332).

  When the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is 4 or more (step S332: YES), the process proceeds to step S345. On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not 4 or more, that is, when it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), the special figure 2 operation reservation balls number is incremented by 1 (+1) (step S333). Proceed to processing.

  Proceeding to the process of step S334, various random numbers (random hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, variation pattern random number 1, The current value of the random number counter 2 of the variation pattern 2) is acquired as game information and stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 (step S334). This process is the same as the process in step S314 of FIG. The special figure 2 operation hold ball is stored in the order in which the start conditions are satisfied, with the maximum hold storage number as a predetermined upper limit value, until it is used for the variable display operation of the special symbol 2.

  Next, prefetch prohibition data (lower byte “01H”) prohibiting prefetch determination is acquired as winning command data (step S335), and it is determined whether or not the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is satisfied (step S335). S336). The “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 2 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 2 operation holding ball is not executed, and thereby the prefetch notice effect is not executed. (Step S336: YES processing route). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, when the game state is accompanied by a “game state with no electric support” state, that is, when the internal game state is in the normal game state or in the latent state, the special symbol 2 side is read ahead. Judgment is prohibited. Thus, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 2 side when the game state is accompanied by the state without the electric support is as follows.

  If it is in the “normal game state” or “latent state”, it is placed under the “no electric support” state, and the winning rate of the lower start opening 35 is significantly reduced. In addition, as described above, when the player aims at the launch position on the normal symbol start port 37 side in the absence of the electric support, the player is aiming so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b. However, it is a game that brings a disadvantage to the player that the winning rate of the upper start opening 34 is remarkably lowered. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not aim the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side during the state without the electric support. Therefore, in the absence of the electric support, it is not necessary to generate the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball, and the prefetch determination is performed one by one for the special figure 2 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate. This is because there arises a problem that the control burden increases.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 1 side (prefetching prohibited state period) and the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 2 side can be switched according to the gaming state. It is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which no pre-reading determination is performed on either the special symbol 1 side or the special symbol 2 side.

  Returning to the description of step S336 again, when the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the process proceeds to step S345. However, if the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S336: NO), the process proceeds to step S337, and a special random number determination table for special figure 2 (see FIG. 29) is acquired (step S337). The jackpot determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 (special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer) is acquired (step S338), and a random number determination process is performed (step S339). In this random number determination process, a “winning lottery” relating to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. Further, the basic processing method is the same as the random number determination processing in step S319 during the special figure 1 starting port check processing of FIG.

  When the random number determination processing in step S339 is completed, the special symbol 2 symbol table selection table (see FIG. 30) is acquired (step S340), and the special symbol determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 is acquired (step S340). S341), special stop symbol data creation processing is performed (step S342). In this special stop symbol data creation process, “symbol lottery” related to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. Further, the basic processing method is the same as the special stop symbol data creation process of step S322 during the special figure 1 start port check process of FIG.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S342 is completed, a start port winning random number determination process similar to that in the special figure 1 start port check process is then performed (step S343), and based on the winning command data and the number of pending action balls Then, a hold addition command is created (steps S344 to S345), the created hold addition command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S346), and the special figure 2 start port check process is exited.

(8-1-1. Random number determination process (winning winning determination process): FIG. 12)
Next, the random number determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10 and step S339 in FIG. 11) will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the random number determination process. This random number determination process is performed as part of the 'prefetch determination' process, and here, "winning lottery (pre-winning (prefetch) winning determination)" related to the prefetch determination using the random number for jackpot determination is performed. Is called.

  In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first refers to the acquired hit random number determination table (FIG. 29), compares the big hit determination random number value with the determination value shown in the hit random number determination table, It is determined whether or not it belongs to the determination value (step S351), and a big hit determination flag and a small hit determination flag corresponding to the current gaming state are acquired (step S352). The hit random number determination table referred to here is the hit random number determination table for special figure 1 of FIG. 29 (a) acquired in the process of step S317 during the special figure 1 starting port check process of FIG. 11 is a special random number determination table for special figure 2 shown in FIG. 29B obtained in the process of step S337 during the special figure 2 starting port check process of FIG.

(T-1. Per-random number determination table: FIG. 29)
The hit random number determination table will be described. FIG. 29 shows a hit random number determination table. FIG. 29 (a) illustrates a special random number determination table for special figure 1 and FIG. 29 (b) illustrates a random number determination table for special figure 2.

  In the hit random number determination table of the present embodiment, the big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability), low probability state (low probability)) and the big hit determination random number value (size of the big hit determination random number: 65536) And a determination area (determination value) for determining a hit type (a big hit, a small win or a loss) is determined in association with each other. Whether it is a big hit, a small hit or a loss is determined depending on whether or not it belongs to. Therefore, even when the acquired jackpot determination random number values belong to the same determination value (the same value for the jackpot determination random number value), the current jackpot lottery probability state is a high probability state or a low probability state. Depending on how, the hit type may be different, such as “big hit” on the one hand and “lost” on the other.

(T-1-1. Random number determination table for special figure 1: FIG. 29 (A))
With reference to FIG. 29A, the random number determination table for special figure 1 will be described.

(About jackpot winning)
In the special random number determination table for special figure 1 of the present embodiment, regarding whether or not the big hit, if the random number for big hit determination belongs to the range of determination values 10001 to 10165, the big hit determination flag is set in both the low probability state and the high probability state. It is “5AH”, and it is “Hot Win”. On the other hand, if the jackpot determination random number value falls within the range of the determination values 10166 to 11650, the winner is determined according to the jackpot lottery probability state. However, under the low probability state, the big hit determination flag is “00H” and “big hit is not won”. In addition, except for the determination value in which the big hit determination flag is “5AH”, “big hit is not won”. In addition, the jackpot winning probability of this embodiment is about 1/397 in the low probability state, about 10 times higher in the high probability state than the low probability state, and about 1 / 39.7 in which the winning probability is increased, and wins the big hit. It is like that.

(About winning small hits)
As for the success / failure of the small hit, when the random number for determining the big hit is in the range of the determination values 20001 to 20112, the small hit determination flag is “5AH” in both the low probability state and the high probability state, and “small winning” If it belongs to any other judgment value, it is “small winning not won”. In other words, the winning probability for the small hit is constant regardless of the big win lottery probability state, and in this respect, the personality is different from that of the above big hit whose fluctuation probability varies depending on the big win lottery probability state. In the present embodiment, the small win winning probability is about 1/585, which is lower than the big win winning probability. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set equal to or higher than the winning probability of winning a jackpot.

(About losing)
If the jackpot determination random number value belongs to a determination value with the jackpot determination flag being “00H” and the jackpot determination is “00H”, neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won. This time, the result of the winning judgment is “losing”.

(T-1-2. Random number determination table for special figure 2: FIG. 29 (b))
Next, the random number determination table for special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The special random number determination table for special figure 2 of this embodiment differs from the random number determination table for special figure 1 in the following points. In the special figure 1 hit random number determination table described above, when the big hit determination random number value falls within the range of the determination values 20001 to 20112, the small hit determination flag is “5AH” in both the low probability state and the high probability state, Become. However, in this special figure 2 random number determination table, there is no determination value itself for winning a small hit. In other words, in the special symbol fluctuation display game 1, the big win, the small hit, and the loss are targeted for the winning lottery, whereas in the special symbol variation display game 2, only the big win and the lost are targeted for the winning lottery. Of course, in the random number determination table for special figure 2 as well, the small hit may be determined as a winning lottery object. It should be noted that the winning probability of the jackpot in the special figure 2 random number determination table is the same as the winning probability in the special figure 1 random number determination table.

  Here, in this embodiment, the state (5AH or 00H) of the big hit determination flag acquired in the processing of step S352 is loaded (loaded) into a general-purpose register (here, A register) built in the CPU, and the small hit determination flag is set. The state (“5AH” or “00H”) is taken into another general-purpose register (D register in this case), and the random number determination process is exited with the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag held in the register. In other words, the CPU 201 does not store the winning lottery results fetched into the A register and the D register in the RAM 203 but leaves the random number determination process while holding the results in the respective registers.

  In the present embodiment, the determination result obtained in the current winning determination process, that is, the data of the winning lottery result in the prefetch determination is immediately used in the subsequent special stop symbol data creating process, and this data is required thereafter. There is nothing. Therefore, there is no problem even if the determination result is left in the register without being stored in the RAM 203 and the random number determination process is exited. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the winning determination process (the winning result related to the prefetch determination), and it is not necessary to provide a dedicated storage area for storing the determination result. The memory capacity of the ROM and RAM can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced. Although the details will be described later, the random number determination process (step S319, step S339 :: winning lottery process in winning process) will be described later as a special electronic article operation determination random number determination process (step S409 in FIG. 15 described later). In the winning lottery process related to the process at the start of change), it is used as a common processing module. However, for the data obtained in the random determination process for determining the special electric component operation described later, the data required later for determining the variation pattern at the start of variation in post-processing and for executing the jackpot game according to the jackpot type Therefore, the situation is different from the above-described random number determination process related to the prefetch determination process, and the data is stored in the RAM 203.

(8-1-2. Special stop symbol data creation process (special stop symbol data creation process when winning a prize): FIG. 13)
Next, the special stop symbol data creation process (step S322 in FIG. 10 and step S342 in FIG. 11) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the special stop symbol data creation process. This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as part of the 'prefetch determination' process, similar to the above random number determination processing. Here, the symbol design lottery (prefetching related to the prefetch determination using the special symbol determination random number value is used. Symbol determination) ”is performed.

  In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first refers to the acquired symbol table selection table (FIG. 30), and the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination processing (step S319 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11), that is, the register A The symbol table (details will be described later) corresponding to the state of the big hit determination flag and the state of the small hit determination flag held in D is acquired (step S361). It should be noted that the symbol table selection table referred to here is the symbol table selection table for special symbol 1 in FIG. 30 (a) acquired in the process of step S320 during the special symbol 1 starting port check processing in FIG. 11 is the special figure 2 symbol table selection table of FIG. 30 (b) acquired in the process of step S340 during the special figure 2 starting port check process of FIG.

(T-2: Symbol table selection table: Fig. 30)
FIG. 30 shows a symbol table selection table. 30A is a diagram illustrating a special table design table for special figure 1, and FIG. 30B is a diagram illustrating a special table design table for special figure 2 selection table.

(T-2-1: Symbol table selection table for special figure 1: FIG. 30 (A))
With reference to FIG. 30 (a), the symbol table selection table for special figure 1 will be described. In the special figure 1 symbol table selection table of the present embodiment, a winning lottery result and a symbol table type (see FIGS. 31 to 33) to be described later are defined in association with each other. Based on the plurality of types of symbol tables, one symbol table is determined. According to the special figure 1 symbol table selection table, when the winning lottery result is a big hit, the “big hit symbol table 1 (FIG. 31 (a))” is used. "Is lost," Lose symbol table 1 (Fig. 32 (B)) "is determined. Details of these symbol tables will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(T-2-2: Special table 2 symbol table selection table: FIG. 30 (b))
Next, the special table 2 symbol table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 2 symbol table selection table, one symbol table is selected from among a plurality of types of symbol tables based on the winning lottery result, in the same manner as the configuration of the special symbol 1 symbol table selection table. It has become so. However, in the special symbol 2 winning symbol table selection table, if the winning lottery result is a big hit, the “big hit symbol table 2 (FIG. 31 (b))” is “missing”, and if it is a loss, the “lost symbol table 2 (see FIG. 32 (b)) ”is determined, and the“ small hit symbol table (FIG. 31) ”for the small hit is not included. This is because, on the special symbol fluctuation display game 2 side (special symbol 2 side), “small hit” is excluded from the winning lottery object, and there is no chance to win a small hit (see FIG. ) “Big hit symbol table 2”).

  If the processing of the above step S361 is specifically described, when the symbol table selection table for special figure 1 is referred to, the winning lottery result (the state of the big hit determination flag and the state of the small hit determination flag) is “big hit ( If the big hit determination flag = 5 AH, the small hit determination flag = 00H) ”, the“ big hit symbol table 1 ”is the“ small hit (big hit determination flag = 00H, small hit determination flag = 5AH) ”. When the “small hit symbol table” is “losing (big hit determination flag = 00H, small hit determination flag = 00H)”, the “lost symbol table 1” is acquired. Further, when the special table 2 symbol table selection table is referred to, when “big hit (big hit determination flag = 5 AH, small hit determination flag = 00H”), “big hit symbol table 2” is “lost: big hit When “determination flag = 00H, small hit determination flag = 00H”, “losing symbol table 2” is acquired.

  Next, the special symbol determination data, the special stop symbol number, and the variation pattern selection offset value are acquired with reference to the symbol table acquired in the process of step S361 (step S362).

(T-3 to T-5. Symbol table: FIGS. 31 to 33)
Each symbol table will be described. FIG. 31 shows a big hit symbol table, FIG. 32 shows a small hit symbol table, and FIG. 33 shows a lost symbol table.

  In the various symbol tables of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, “special symbol determination random number value (special symbol determination random number value: 200)”, “special symbol determination data, A special stop symbol number and a determination area (determination value) for determining “variation pattern selection offset” are determined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol determination random number value belongs to any determination value. Depending on whether or not, the jackpot type, special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset are determined.

  The “special symbol determination data” is data for identifying the hit type. Specifically, in the case of a big hit (when the big hit determination flag = 5 AH, the small hit determination flag = 00H), the special symbol determination data is “01H” indicates “2R short open latent large hit”, “02H” indicates “10R long open positive change big hit”, and “03H” indicates “15R long open positive change big hit”. In the case of small hit (when big hit determination flag = 00H, small hit determination flag = 5 AH), when the special symbol determination data is “01H”, “small hit A”, and when “02H”, “small” A hit B 'or "03H" indicates a' small hit C '. In the case of a loss (when the big hit determination flag = 00H, the small hit determination flag = 00H), when the special symbol determination data is “00H”, it indicates that the loss is “A to C”. This special symbol determination data is used in processing related to gaming state transition control (for example, gaming state transition preparation processing in step S411 in FIG. 15 described later) and processing related to jackpot gaming (for example, special electric accessory processing (step S060)). Data used.

  The “special stop symbol number” is data for designating a special stop symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and is used when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the main control unit 20 side. The In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, a special stop symbol number corresponding to each determination value is selected. For example, even in the case of the same 2R short-open latency probability hit, The display mode of the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (in this embodiment, the display mode of “7-segment”) may be different. The same applies to the small hit symbol table and the lost symbol table described later. In this way, even if the winning type is the same, even if the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display device is determined by defining a plurality of types of special stop symbol numbers according to the special symbol determination random number value, It is difficult to tell what kind of big hits, small hits or loses a player has won. As in this embodiment, if the behavior during the 2R latent big hit game is substantially the same as that during the small hit game, not only the mechanical operation and production of the big prize opening, but also a special To make it difficult for the player to understand the winning type from the special stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device, in order to raise the expectation of rushing into a high probability state, that is, to win the winning expectation of 2R short-open latency big hit It is valid.

  The above “variation pattern selection offset (indicated as“ offset value ”in the drawing)” is offset data used when selecting a later-described pending addition command or variation pattern designation command.

(T-3. Jackpot symbol table: FIG. 31)
The jackpot symbol table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 (a) illustrates the jackpot symbol table 1 (special bonus symbol table for special figure 1) and FIG. 31 (b) illustrates the jackpot symbol table 2 (special symbol jackpot symbol table).

(T-3-1: jackpot symbol table 1: FIG. 31 (A))
In the jackpot symbol table 1 of the present embodiment, a special symbol determination random number value and a determination value for determining the jackpot type are mainly associated with each other. Specifically, the special symbol determination random number value is determined. One of the big hits is determined from a plurality of types of big hits depending on which judgment value belongs to. Referring to the “judgment value” column of the jackpot symbol table 1 shown in the figure, if the random number for special symbol determination falls within the range of determination values 0 to 119, the “2R short open latent probability big hit” is won (symbol selection) Rate (symbol lottery probability): 120/200), if it falls within the range of judgment values 120 to 179, “10R long open probability change big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 60/200), range of judgment values 180 to 199 If it belongs to the category, it will be a “15R long open probability variable big hit” win (symbol selection rate: 20/200), and any one of the big hits will be determined with a predetermined symbol selection rate. . Similarly, the small hit symbol table (FIG. 32) described later is such that the small hit type (small hits A to C) is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate, and the loss symbol table (described later) Similarly, in FIG. 33), the loss type (losses A to C) is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate.

(T-3-2: jackpot symbol table 2: FIG. 31 (b))
The jackpot symbol table 2 of this embodiment has the same basic configuration as the jackpot symbol table 1 described above, but differs from the jackpot symbol table 1 in the following points. The jackpot symbol table 2 is different from the jackpot symbol table 1 in a specific jackpot symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability). Specifically, when it falls within the range of the judgment value 0 to 79, it becomes the “10R long open probability variation big hit” winning (symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability): 80/200) and belongs to the range of the judgment value 80 to 199. In this case, “15R long open probability change big hit” is won (symbol selection rate: 120/200), and “2R short open latent big hit” is a winning configuration. The symbol lottery based on the jackpot symbol table 1 is more likely to be selected than the symbol lottery, which is a symbol lottery advantageous to the player. That is, the game development is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 than the special symbol variation display game 1.

(T-4: Small hits design table: FIG. 32)
Next, the small hit symbol table will be described with reference to FIG. As in the configuration of the big hit symbol table described above, the small hit symbol table of the present embodiment depends on whether the special symbol determination random number value belongs to one of the determination areas (determination values) or not. Any one of hits A to C), special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset are determined.

(T-5: Lost symbol table: Fig. 33)
Next, the lost symbol table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a diagram illustrating a lost symbol table 1 (a lost symbol table for special figure 1), and FIG. 33B is a diagram illustrating a lost symbol table 2 (a lost symbol table for special figure 2).

  In each of the lost symbol tables 1 and 2 of the present embodiment, whether or not the special symbol determination random number value belongs to any one of the determination areas (determination values), as in the configuration of the big hit symbol table or the small hit table. Thus, the loss type (any of the loss A to C), the special symbol determination data, the special stop symbol number, and the variation pattern selection offset are determined. As shown in the figure, the lost symbol table 1 and the lost symbol table 2 have different determination values related to the winning of the lost A to C. Accordingly, even if the special symbol determination random number is the same value, the case where the loss symbol table 1 is referred to and the case where the loss symbol table 2 is referred to may be different in the type of loss that is won.

  In the process of step S362, regarding the various data obtained from the symbol table described above ((the symbol lottery result in the pre-reading determination: special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset), the special symbol determination data Is stored in the A register, the special stop symbol number is stored in the B register, and the variation pattern selection offset is stored in the C register.In this state, the special stop symbol data creation process is exited, and the start opening winning random number determination process is performed. The process proceeds to step S323 if the special chart 1 start opening check process in Fig. 10 is in progress, and proceeds to step 343 if the special figure 2 start opening check process in Fig. 11 is in progress. , And the data fetched into the C register without storing the data in the RAM 203. While holding to, exit the special stop symbol data creation process.

  Various data of the judgment results (design lottery results in the pre-reading judgment) obtained in this special stop symbol data creation process are immediately used in the subsequent random determination process at the time of starting opening winning, and then this data is required There is no. Therefore, there is no problem even if the special stop symbol data creation process is exited while the determination result is not stored in the RAM 203 but is held in the register. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the special stop symbol data creation process and eliminates the need for a separate storage area for storing the determination result, thus reducing the memory capacity. , Control burden can be reduced. Although the details will be described later, the special stop symbol data creation process (step S322 in FIG. 10, step S342 in FIG. 11: symbol lottery process in the winning process) is a stop symbol creation process (step in FIG. 15 to be described later). In S410: symbol lottery process of the fluctuation start process), it is used as a common processing module. However, since the data obtained in the stop symbol creation process described later is data necessary for determining the variation pattern at the start of variation in post-processing and executing the jackpot game according to the jackpot type, pre-reading determination The situation is different from the above-described special stop symbol data creation process related to the process, and the data is stored in the RAM 203.

(8-1-3. Random number determination process at start-up winning prize: FIG. 14)
Next, the start opening winning random number determination process (step S323 in FIG. 10, step S343 in FIG. 11) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the start opening winning random number determination process. This start-point winning random number determination process is performed as part of the 'prefetch determination' process, similar to the random number determination process (steps S319 and S339) and the special stop symbol data creation process (steps S322 and S342). Then, a process of creating winning command data (second byte (EVENT): lower byte) used for creating a “hold addition command” to be described later is performed. A look-ahead variation pattern (excluding reserved ball number information) is designated by the winning command data (EVENT) determined in the starting opening winning random number determination process.

  This starting port winning random number determination process includes the following processes (a) and (b) as processes for determining the winning command data (EVENT) for designating the pre-reading variation pattern.

(A) With reference to a winning command distribution table selection table (FIG. 35), a winning command distribution table (FIGS. 36 and 37) according to the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode). “Winning command distribution table determination process (steps S371 to S373)”,
(B) Based on the winning command distribution table, “winning command data determination processing (steps S373 to S374)” for determining winning command data (lower byte side of the pending addition command (EVENT)) is configured. The

  Here, the “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” functions as a “variation pattern selection mode” and is data for identifying the current gaming state. Referring to the variation pattern allocation designation number table of FIG. 49, when the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is “00H”, it indicates “normal A”, and when it is “01H”, “normal B”. "02H" indicates "normal C", and "03H" indicates "probability change state (probability change)". This variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is changed when there is a change in the gaming state. Therefore, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is different from data identifying the internal gaming state itself, such as a gaming state determination number (YJ) described later, in that it identifies the gaming state as described above. Hereinafter, the processing methods (a) and (b) will be specifically described.

(A) Winning command distribution table determination process (steps S371 to S373)
In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first corrects the “variation pattern selection offset value” obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (steps S322 and S342) (step S371: offset correction process for winning variation pattern selection). . Here, as data for selecting a winning command distribution table from the winning command distribution table selection table of FIG. 35, a predetermined correction is made for the offset value for selecting a variation pattern obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process. Processing is performed to acquire a new variation pattern selection offset value.

  Referring to FIG. 34, the winning correction pattern selection offset correction processing in step S371 will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the offset correction process for winning variation pattern selection, and FIG. 34 (a) shows the variation pattern selection offset value obtained by the special stop symbol data creation process (hereinafter referred to as “winning winning pattern”). (Hereinafter referred to as “offset value before correction”) and a list of the contents thereof, and FIG. A list is shown.

  In FIG. 34 (a), for example, when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning is “00H”, the winning lottery and the symbol lottery for the special figure 1 operation holding ball (indicated as “special figure 1” in the figure) are performed. The prefetch determination result based on this indicates “losing A”. In addition, when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning is “04H”, the pre-read determination result based on the winning lottery and the symbol lottery for the special figure 2 operation holding ball (indicated as “special figure 2” in the figure) is “losing A” In addition, the fluctuation pattern selection offset value obtained by the special stop symbol data creation process and its contents are shown (see the column of “offset value” in the symbol table shown in FIGS. 31 to 33). In the figure, “Special Figure 1” indicates the special figure 1 operation holding ball side, and “Special Figure 2” indicates the special figure 2 operation holding ball side.

  Note that the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning shown in FIG. 34 (a) is partially skipped for the following reason.

  When the variation of the pre-reading notice effect is to be abundant, not only the big hit lottery result but also the random number for the fluctuation pattern is used because the rough contents of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation are specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern. It is necessary to determine the look-ahead variation pattern, and a simple control process that is common to both is desired. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the control burden, the random determination process (steps S319 and S339) at the time of winning a prize is changed to the random determination process for determining the operation of a special electric instrument at the start of fluctuation ( It is used as a common processing module in step S409 of FIG. 15 described later, and special stop symbol data creation processing (steps S322 and S342) in winning process is special stop symbol creation processing in variation start process (described later). 15 in step S410) as a common processing module. For this reason, the variation pattern selection offset obtained in the winning process (offset value before the correction process in step S371) and the variation pattern selection offset value obtained in the fluctuation start process (before the correction process in step S441 described later) The offset value takes the same value as the offset value having the same designated content (see the table before correction processing in FIG. 34A and FIG. 41A described later).

  In addition, when there are many variations of effects during the symbol variation display game, it is necessary to increase the types of variation patterns of special symbols, so the variation pattern selection offset value used in the variation start processing is Although the contents are in consideration of the number of operation hold balls (refer to a table after correction processing in FIG. 41 (B) described later), the number of operation hold balls is not considered at the time of prefetch determination. This is because the number of the operation suspending balls at the time of the prefetch determination does not necessarily match the number of the operation suspending at the start of the variation, and therefore, the content of the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation cannot be prefetched. For this reason, the variation pattern selection offset before the correction process at the time of winning or at the start of variation creates a vacant number that takes into account the number of active balls to be held (partial values of offset values 01H to 03H, 05H to 06H are empty numbers).

  Although the details will be described later, the winning command distribution table selection table is configured so that the winning command distribution table can be selected using continuous addresses in order to reduce the memory capacity and simplify the program. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the address search of the winning command distribution table based on the winning command distribution table selection table, the following correction processing is applied to the offset value before correction at the time of winning, and the jump value is calculated. By correcting to a continuous value, the processing when selecting the winning command distribution table is simplified, and the control burden is reduced.

  In the correction process in step S371, when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning exceeds “07H” (when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning> 07H), “07H” is calculated from the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning. Is subtracted, and when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning does not exceed “07H” (if the pre-correction offset value at winning time ≦ 07H), the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning is changed to “00H”.

  The new variation pattern selection offset value (offset value after correction at the time of winning) obtained by this correction processing and its contents are as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, this offset value is used to select a target winning command distribution table from the winning command distribution table selection table (steps S372 to S373).

  When the correction process in step S371 is completed, a winning command distribution table selection table is acquired (step S372), and the corrected variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution are referred to with reference to the winning command distribution table selection table. A winning command distribution table corresponding to the designated number (Tcode) is acquired (step S373).

(T-6. Winning command distribution table selection table: FIG. 35)
FIG. 35 shows a winning command distribution table selection table. In the winning command distribution table selection table of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning command distribution tables associated with the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) are defined. Specifically, one winning command distribution table is determined from among a plurality of types of winning command distribution tables based on the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode). It has become.

  The winning command distribution table selection table stores the address value of the winning command distribution table according to the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode). In order to simplify the program, the data structure uses continuous addresses so as to correspond to the offset value for selecting the variation pattern. To select a winning command distribution table, first select a winning command distribution table selection table corresponding to the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), and select a winning command distribution table according to the offset value for variation pattern selection. To do. That is, in the winning command distribution table selection table selected for each variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), the top address value that defines the winning command distribution table is described. Addition processing for adding a variation pattern selection offset value (here, an offset value obtained in the correction processing in step S371 described later) is performed, a relative address with respect to the start address is obtained, and the address of the target winning command distribution table By specifying a value, a winning command distribution table can be selected.

(B) Winning command data determination process (steps S374 to S375)
The CPU 201 acquires the winning command distribution table selection table in the process of step S372, then acquires the random number 1 for the variation pattern (step S374), and refers to the winning command distribution table (FIGS. 36 and 37). Then, “winning command data” corresponding to the random number 1 for the variation pattern is acquired (step S375).

(T-7. Winning command allocation table: FIGS. 36 and 37)
The winning command distribution table will be described. FIG. 36 shows a winning prize command distribution table selected at the time of winning, and FIG. 37 shows a lost winning command distribution table selected at the time of losing.

  Referring to FIG. 36, the winning prize command distribution table of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of winning prize command distribution tables “a1 to a6”, and the lost winning command distribution table includes a plurality of types of lost games. The winning command distribution table “h1 to h9” is included. In these winning command distribution tables, variation pattern random value 1 (variation pattern random value 1 size: 239) and winning command data (EVENT) are defined in association with each other. One lot of winning command data is determined from among a plurality of types of winning command data by lottery using the pattern random number value 1. The “variation pattern random value 1” is a random number that is also used when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation (see the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) described later: see FIG. 15). In the present embodiment, by using the same random number value for variation pattern 1 in the processing related to prefetch determination and the processing related to determination of the variation pattern at the start of variation, the variation pattern at the beginning of variation that will be determined in the future It is possible to determine in advance what type of variation pattern is determined in advance.

  Note that “prefetch variation pattern determination content” in the drawing indicates the content of the prefetch variation pattern designated by the winning command data (EVENT). Further, the Arabic numerals in the figure indicate the distribution value (the size of the determination area) (the same notation in FIGS. 37 and 43 to 44 described later). In other words, winning command data “0EH” designating “weak SP reach A” is selected at a ratio of 50/239 (distribution value / lottery area size).

  Here, for convenience of explanation, “selection rate” is shown in the figure, but actually, a determination area (determination) for determining the winning command data (EVENT) according to the random number 1 for the variation pattern. Value). That is, “winning command data (EVENT)” is determined in the winning time process depending on which judgment value the random number 1 for variation pattern belongs to.

  The relationship between the distribution value and the determination value shown in the figure is as follows. For example, the win command distribution table “a2” will be described as a representative example. When the distribution value is referred to from the position where the distribution value is first described when viewed in the column direction from the front to the bottom of the drawing, the distribution value is “ 50 ”,“ 80 ”,“ 39 ”,“ 70 ”, which are described in this order. The content of the variation pattern random value 1 is in the range of the judgment values 0 to 49 (the distribution value“ 50 ”above). The command “0EH” for designating “weak SP reach A” is selected, and it belongs to the range of judgment values 50 to 129 (corresponding to the description column for the distribution value “80”). If the command “0FH” for specifying “strong SP reach A” is selected and belongs to the range of the judgment values 130 to 168 (corresponding to the description column of the distribution value “39” above), “weak SP reach B” is selected. The designated command “10H” is selected, and the judgment value 169 If it belongs to 238 range (corresponding to the description column of the sorting value "80") means the contents of the command "11H" to specify the "strength SP reach B" is selected. Similarly, for example, if the lose prize command distribution table “h2” is described as a representative example, the distribution values are described in the order of “150” and “89”. If it belongs to the range (corresponding to the description column of the distribution value “150”), the command “04H” designating “weak SP reach A” is selected, and the range of the judgment values 150 to 238 (the distribution value “89”) is selected. ”Means that the command“ 05H ”designating“ strong SP reach A ”is selected. 43 to 44, which will be described later, has the same notation of “selection rate”, but a determination value corresponding to the random number value 1 or 2 for the variation pattern is determined in the same manner as described above. Is omitted to avoid duplication).

  The winning prize command distribution table includes the following as winning prize command data for designating a pre-reading fluctuation pattern at the time of winning. Command data for specifying “2R short open latency / small hit win 1” used in “Normal A” or “Normal B” to specify 2R short open latency big win or small win win Command data specified by “2R short open latency / small win winning 2” used in “normal C”, “2R short open latency / small hit winning 3” used in “probability change state” 3 Command data for specifying "." In addition, the 10R and 15R long-open probability variable big wins are designated as “Weak SP Reach A”, “Weak SP Reach B”, “Strong SP Reach A” and “Strong” used during “Normal A” or “Normal B”. Each command data designating “SP reach B”, command data designating “special reach” used in “normal C”, command data designating “reaching during probability change” used in “probability change state”, etc. Is included.

  The lost winning command distribution table includes the following as lost winning command data for designating the pre-reading variation pattern at the time of the lost. “Low SP Reach A”, “Weak SP Reach B”, “Strong SP Reach A”, and “Strong SP Reach B” used in “Normal A” or “Normal B” to specify the fluctuation pattern with reach Each command data to be specified, command data specifying “special reach” used in “normal C”, winning command data specifying “reach during probability change” used in “probability change state”, and the like are included. In the case of “losing”, unlike the case of “winning”, the possibility of winning a big hit is zero, and therefore, there is a loss fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation pattern) indicating no reach. The command data specifying “normal fluctuation” used during “normal A”, “normal B”, or “normal C”, Command data specifying “normal fluctuation (2 s)” used in “status” is included.

  In the figure, the loss winning command data “03H” designating “indefinite (normal fluctuation / reach)” indicates whether the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is a normal fluctuation pattern or a fluctuation pattern with reach at the time of prefetch determination. This is command data that specifies that it is unknown. This is because the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of suspended balls in the variation pattern determination stage at the beginning of variation (the special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S412 of FIG. 19), at the time of the prefetch determination, the number of the operation suspension balls at the time of the prefetch determination does not necessarily coincide with the number of the operation suspension at the start of the variation, and therefore, it is not possible to make a prefetch determination of the variation pattern at the start of the exact variation. . For this reason, in the pre-reading variation pattern determination stage, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of suspended balls, and when the variation pattern random value 1 is “210 to 238”, the variation pattern is a normal variation pattern. This is because it is not possible to determine whether the variation pattern has reach or not (see FIGS. 42 and 44 described later). Specifically, in the case of the loss A at the start of the change, unlike the case of the prefetch determination, one of the first steps H1 to H4 of the loss change pattern distribution table is selected according to the number of operation suspension balls at the start of the change. There is a possibility (see the column of offset values 00H to 03H in FIG. 42, H1 to H4 in FIG. 44), and when H1 is selected, the determination value “0 to 209 (selection rate 210/239)” is “normal” Fluctuation 1 (12 s) ', determination value “210 to 238 (selection rate 29/239)” is selected as “N reach”, and when H2 is selected, determination value “0 to 219 (selection rate 220/239) ) ”Is selected as“ normal fluctuation 1 (12 s) ”, and“ N reach ”is selected as the determination value“ 220 to 238 (selectivity 19/239) ”, and when H3 is selected, the determination value“ 0 to 229 ( "Selectivity 230/239)" 2 (8 s) ′, when “N reach” is selected in the determination values “230 to 238 (selection rate 9/239)” and H4 is selected, “normal fluctuation 3 ( This is because only “3s)” is selected. This problem occurs particularly in the case of Loss A, but the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation in the case of Loss A of the present embodiment is mainly “normal fluctuation” or “N reach” with a relatively low expectation of winning a big hit. Therefore, there is no particular problem even if the “normal fluctuation” is exceptionally determined without determining the above “indefinite (normal fluctuation / reach)”. In the present embodiment, if the determination value is “210 to 238”, the possibility of “N reach” is increased. You may judge.

  Returning to step S375 again. In the process of step S375, the winning command data (EVENT) obtained from the winning command distribution table is taken into the C register, and in this state, the start opening winning random number determination process is exited. . In other words, the CPU 201 does not store the winning command data (EVENT) fetched in the C register in the RAM 203, but leaves the starting opening winning random number determination process while holding it in the register.

  The determination result (winning command data) obtained by the starting port random number determining process at this time is immediately used in the process of creating the subsequent pending addition command, and this data is not required thereafter. Therefore, there is no problem even if the determination result is left in the predetermined register without being stored in the RAM 203 and the random number determination process at the start opening prize is exited. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the random number determination process at the start-up winning prize, and it is not necessary to provide a separate storage area for the RAM 203, thereby reducing the memory capacity and the control burden. Can do.

(C-1: Hold addition command: FIG. 38)
Next, the hold addition command will be described. As already described, when the CPU 201 finishes the start opening winning random number determination process (step S323 in FIG. 10 and step S343 in FIG. 11), the CPU 201 subsequently obtains the lower rank obtained in the starting opening winning random number determination process. Based on the byte-side winning command data (EVENT) and the higher-order byte-side winning command data (MODE) based on the current number of pending balls for operation, a “hold addition command” is created, and this is not stored in the RAM 203. And transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see steps S324 to S326 in FIG. 10 and steps 344 to S346 in FIG. 11).

  The reason why the pending addition command is not stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. After the hold addition command is sent from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, it is only used when the “pre-reading notice effect” relating to the current operation holding ball appears on the effect control unit 24 side. Yes, it is not particularly used in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15) described later. Therefore, there is no particular problem even if the start opening check process (FIGS. 10 and 11) is exited without storing the pending addition command in the RAM 203. In the present embodiment, various types of data obtained by a series of 'look-ahead determination' processing related to winning time processing such as winning determination processing, special stop symbol data creation processing, and start opening winning random number determination processing are stored in the RAM 203 one by one. By setting the start port check process to be completed without doing so, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity of the ROM and RAM and reduce the control burden.

  FIG. 38 shows a list of the hold addition commands. As shown in the figure, the pending addition command is composed of 2-byte control data. Specifically, the upper byte (first byte (MODE) “BXH (B6H to B9H is a special symbol 1) created according to the number of balls to be held and the special symbol type (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2). BBH to BEH correspond to 1 to 4 actuated balls of special symbol 2, respectively))), and at the start opening winning random number determination process of step S323 The lower byte (the second byte (EVENT) “XXH (XX is a numerical value corresponding to each command)”) is formed. Therefore, the hold addition command includes prefetch determination result information obtained in a series of processes (steps S317 to S323) relating to prefetch determination, specifically, prefetch variation pattern information. In the present embodiment, it is possible to create a hold addition command in a form including “information on the number of reserved balls for operation and special symbol type” and “information on the look-ahead variation pattern” and transmit this to the effect control unit 24. Although configured, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a first hold addition command including information on the number of operating balls to be held and a special symbol type (special stop symbol number) or a hit type (special symbol determination data), and a second hold addition including information on a look-ahead variation pattern The information may be divided into commands, and each piece of information may be transmitted to the effect control unit 24 using separate effect control commands.

  When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 receives the lottery and performs a lottery (prefetch notice lottery) regarding whether or not to perform the prefetch notice effect based on information included in the hold addition command. If the result of the lottery is determined to be feasible (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the pre-reading for the currently activated ball at the start of the symbol variation display game or at a predetermined timing during the game Make a notice effect appear. In addition, when receiving the hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 may cause a “winning effect” to appear to indicate that a winning has been made at the start opening, regardless of whether or not a pre-reading notice effect is displayed. it can.

  Even when there is a new winning when the number of balls held for operation is four or more, a holding addition command at the time of an overflow winning (hereinafter abbreviated as “OF holding addition command”) is created, and the production control unit 24 is transmitted. This OF pending addition command is also composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte (MODE) is “B5H (corresponds to special symbol 1)” or “BAH (corresponds to special symbol 2)”, and the lower byte (EVENT) is an overflow prize. “00H” is designated. The lower byte may be created during the random number determination process at the time of starting entrance prize. Also, “OF data acquisition process” for acquiring data for overflow winning (lower byte “00H”) once between the processes of steps S311 and S312 of FIG. 10 and the processes of steps S331 and S332 of FIG. If it is an overflow prize (the determination result in step S312 is “YES”, or the determination result in step S332 is “YES”), the process proceeds to step S325 or S345 as it is to create the “OF hold addition command”, If it is not an overflow prize (the determination result in step S312 is “NO”, or the determination result in step S332 is “NO”), the processing route for performing step S313 or S333 is entered, and the data (EVENT generated in the OF data acquisition process) ) “00H”) at the beginning of step S323 or S343 By rewriting the data acquired in the random number determination process at the mouth winning it may be configured to create a pending addition command purposes.

  Further, it has been described that the OF hold addition command is not used for the pre-reading determination but is used exclusively for the above “winning effect”. However, the following effect can be configured to appear. . For example, when the production control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned OF hold addition command, on the condition that there is a “big hit (may include a small hit)” among the current operation hold balls. You may comprise so that the notice effect (In-game notice effect on hold at the time of OF winning) can be shown. In this case, when receiving the hold addition command, the production control unit 24 stores the prefetch determination information storage means for storing the prefetch determination information included therein, and when receiving the OF hold addition command, On the condition that there is an item that will be a “big hit (may include a small win)” (determining whether to make a notification through a predetermined lottery) It is also possible to include an on-hold notice effect means. Furthermore, on the condition that the result of the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is “big hit (may include small hits)”, a notice effect (notice effect during fluctuation when winning OF) May be configured to be able to appear. In this case, when the effect control unit 24 receives the OF hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 notifies that there is a possibility that the game result related to the current symbol variation is “big hit (may include small hits)” (predetermined It may be determined whether or not to notify by a notification lottery). Such a notice effect is similar to the prize effect that appears when an overflow prize is generated, but in that the result of the symbol variation display game for which the final result has not yet been derived has been proactively notified. It plays the same role as the pre-reading notice.

(8-3. Special symbol variation start processing: FIG. 15)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S305) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process of FIG.

  In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S401). If the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), Proceeding to the process of S403, the process (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the change for the operation holding ball to be used for the current change display is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is zero (step S402). If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process proceeds to step S403, and the process (steps S403 to S416) related to the start of variation of the special symbol for the suspended action ball used for the present variation display is performed. Do. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, “priority change ranking” indicating which of the special figure 1 operation holding sphere and the special figure 2 operation holding sphere is preferentially used for the change display operation (whether the operation holding sphere is digested). "Is decided. The processing in steps S401 and S402 is performed as “priority change means” for preferentially digesting the special figure 2 operation holding ball when both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball exist. Function.

  In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball exists in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball by the priority changing means, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested, that is, The special symbol variation display game 2 is executed more preferentially than the special symbol variation display game 1. More specifically, on the condition that the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed, the first reserved storage area (first reserved storage means (the reserved storage area related to the operation reserved ball on the special symbol 1 side)). ) Is stored with the hold data relating to the special symbol 1 (first hold memory: special figure 1 operation hold ball), the second hold storage area (second hold storage means (the operation hold ball on the special symbol 2 side) If the second reserved data relating to the special symbol 2 (second reserved memory: special figure 2 operation holding ball) is not stored in the reserved memory area))), the second of the first reserved data When the second special hold data is stored in the second reserved storage area while the variable display of the first special symbol based on the previously stored reserved data is started, the first reserved The first hold data is stored in the storage area. Regardless of whether or not they are 憶, so as to start earliest variable display of the second special symbol based on the stored pending data out of the second pending data.

  In addition, when the number of operation hold balls of both the special figure 2 operation hold ball number and the special figure 1 operation hold ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), this “no operation hold ball” state Is a case where the special symbol is in a standby state and has no reserved memory, and informs the effect control unit 24 that it has entered this state. Therefore, if “no operation hold ball” is reached, the process proceeds to step S417, the special symbol operation status is switched to “standby (00H)” (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status: step S418), and the production control command Then, a “demonstration display command” for displaying the demonstration screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419). If the effect control unit 24 does not receive an effect control command (for example, a hold addition command) related to the symbol variation display game even after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the demonstration display command, the variation display operation is not performed for a certain period of time. It is assumed that a state (standby waiting state) has occurred, and the liquid crystal display device 36 performs “demonstration screen display” to notify that the game standby state is in progress.

  If the number of special reserved action balls 1 or special figure 2 active reservation balls is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), to start the change of special symbols for the active hold balls to be used for the current fluctuation display Such processing (steps S403 to S417) is performed. In addition, about the process of step S403-S417 demonstrated below, when it is "NO" by determination of said step S401, it is the process for the special figure 2 action holding ball, and by determination of said step S402. If it is NO ', it will be the processing for the special figure 1 action holding ball, but the way of processing is the same, so unless there is a special need to avoid duplicate description, the action holding on the special symbol 1 side The description will be made without distinguishing whether the process is a process for a sphere or a process for an operation holding ball on the special symbol 2 side.

  If it progresses to step S403, 1 will subtract the number of operation reservation balls (the number of operation reservation balls concerning the special symbol side used for the present variable display operation -1: step S403), The “subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S404).

  Next, special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the current variation start side. For example, if special symbol 1 is the variation start side, “00H” is indicated, and special symbol 2 is the variation start side. If there is, “01H” is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

  Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the hold data (the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the fluctuation pattern random number) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1. 1 and the variation pattern random number 2) are read out and stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage area (hold 2 storage area, reserved) corresponding to the reserved n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) The storage data stored in the storage area 3 and the storage area 4 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and the storage area 4 is cleared (step S407). That is, the hold data in the hold 1 storage area is shifted to the random number storage area for determination, and the hold data after the hold 2 storage area is numbered one by one (hold 2 storage area → hold 1 storage area, hold 3 storage). Area → holding 2 storage area, holding 4 storage area → holding 3 storage area) and overwriting, and providing an empty area in the holding 4 storage area (if no new active holding ball is generated, processing in step S407) Since the vacant area is sequentially shifted each time the operation is performed, the entire reserved storage area becomes an empty area when all the operating spheres are used. As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number n of the operation reservation balls (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and any of the operation reservation balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is stored. Whether the area corresponds to the area is specified, and the storage of a new operation holding ball becomes possible.

  Next, remaining short time command transmission processing is performed (step S408). Here, it is determined whether or not a special symbol short-time counter (counter for counting the remaining number of times until the special symbol short-time state is terminated) described later is zero. A “remaining short time number command” including the remaining short time number information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S408). The “remaining short time number command” is used when the remaining time short number information is notified on the effect control unit 24 side.

  Next, a random determination process for determining the special electronic component operation is performed (step S409). In this special electronic component activation determination random number determination process, a “winning lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed using the random number for determining the big hit. Note that the random determination process for determining the operation of the special electronic component is “random determination process” (step S319 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11, that is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “winning lottery” is performed. This is a process that works in the same way as “see FIG. 12 showing the details”, but here, unlike “winning lottery” in “look-ahead determination”, the operation holding ball used for the current variable display operation is targeted The “winning lottery” in “determination at the start of change”. The details of the special electronic component activation determination random number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the random determination process for determining the special electronic component operation in step S409 is completed, a special stop symbol creating process is then performed (step S410). In this special stop symbol creation process, the “symbol lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed by using the winning lottery result and the special symbol determination random number value of the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination in step S409. Do. The special stop symbol creation process is “special stop symbol data creation process (step S322 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11, its details), which is one of the“ prefetch determination ”processes in that“ design lottery ”is performed. 13) ”, but here, unlike“ symbol drawing ”in“ look-ahead determination ”, the target is a suspended ball used for the current variable display operation. This is a “symbol drawing” in “determination at the start of change”. Details of the special symbol stop symbol creation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 is completed, a game state transition preparation process is then performed (step S411). In the game state transition preparation process, a setting process necessary for designating the game state after the big hit game is performed as a setting for shifting the game state. Based on the data set here, the gaming state after the big hit game is specified. Details of the game state transition preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game state transition preparation process in step S411 is completed, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is then performed (step S412). In this special symbol variation pattern creation process, the winning lottery result obtained in the special electric utility activation determination random number determination processing, the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation processing, the variation pattern random number 1, and the variation pattern random number 2 are obtained. The variation pattern of the special symbol to be used for this variation display operation is determined, and a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern is created as an effect control command. Note that the special symbol variation pattern creation process is a random number determination process at the time of winning a winning prize, which is one of the 'look-ahead determination' processing in terms of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, and a creation process related to the pending addition command (step of FIG. 10) S323 to S325, steps S343 to S345 in FIG. 11 (see FIG. 14). However, here, a special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the current variable display operation is shown. A variation pattern (a variation pattern at the start of variation) is determined. Details of the special symbol variation pattern creation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, 5AH (ON state) is stored in a special symbol N changing flag (N = 1, 2) for designating that the change display is being performed (step S413). The “special symbol N changing flag” is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), the special symbol changes. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

  Next, a decorative symbol designation command is created based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 (step S414) and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes: an upper byte (MODE) that designates a special symbol type on the variable side, and a lower byte (EVNET) that designates a big hit type, a small hit, and a loss. Therefore, this decorative symbol designation command includes the special symbol type on the variable side and part of the winning category information. Specifically, the upper byte (MODE) side is “BBH” when the special symbol on the variable side is special symbol 1, “BCH” when the special symbol is 2, and the lower byte (EVENT) side is In case of loss, “01H” regardless of the type, “05H” in case of small hit regardless of type, “05H” in case of big hit, 2R short open latent big hit is “02H”, 10R long open positive variable big hit “03H” and 15R long open probability variation big hit “04H” are selected. This decoration designating command mainly determines the combination of the decorative design (reach design) when forming the reach state and the combination of the decorative design (decoration stop design) to be finally stopped and displayed on the production control unit 24 side. It is used when doing.

  Then, as the change start time setting process, the special symbol operation status is switched to “Fluctuating (02H)” (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the determination random number storage area (cleared to zero) (step S416). ).

  As described above, when the special symbol variation start processing is exited, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) of FIG. 9 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started. As a result, the special symbol management process (step S059) is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S060) of FIG.

(8-3-1. Random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric appliances (winning determination process at the start of change): FIG. 16)
Next, the random number determination process (step S409) for determining the special electric component operation will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the random determination process for determining the special electric component operation in FIG.

  In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first determines the random number determination table for special figure 1 (see FIG. 29 (a)) or the random number determination table for special figure 2 (see FIG. 29 (b)) based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. ) Is acquired (step S421), and the jackpot determination random number stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired (step S422).

  Next, a random number determination process is performed (step S423: random number determination process in the variation start process). Here, the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag are acquired based on the big hit determination random number value and the current big hit lottery probability state with reference to the hit random number determination table acquired in the process of step S421. Then, this random number determination process is exited while the acquired state of the big hit determination flag and the state of the small hit determination flag are taken into the registers (A register and D register).

  In other words, the random number determination process in step S423 is “random number determination process in winning process (random number determination process in special figure 1 start opening check process (step S319 in FIG. 10), random determination process in special figure 2 start opening check process” (Step S339 in FIG. 11)) ”. That is, both are configured as a common processing module, and as a result, the same program configuration can be used. In this way, the random number determination process of the winning process and the random number determination process of the fluctuation start process can be used as a common processing module, so that when independent processes are provided (in separate programs) The amount of programs and the amount of memory can be reduced more than the description), and the control burden can be reduced.

  In particular, in the “gaming machine with a prefetch function” that generates a prefetch notice effect and enhances the gameability as in the present embodiment, the program amount is not increased due to an increase in processing related to the prefetch determination. A situation can occur that does not. However, for gaming machines that are installed in pachinko parlors, specifically, for gaming machines that are subject to No. 7 sales under the Act on Regulations on Customs Business and Optimization of Business, etc. And the rules relating to the type verification, etc., restrict the program capacity of the ROM mounted on the main board (in the present embodiment, the main control unit 20) that controls the overall game operation (the table attached to the rule). Third, technical standards related to the structure of gaming machines to prevent unauthorized modification and other changes (related to Article 6), and the reduction of program capacity are important.

  After exiting the random number determination process in step S423, the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag held in each register are stored in the hit determination flag area of the RAM 203 (step S424). The reason why the data obtained by the random number determination process in step S423 is stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. The data obtained in the random number determination process of the special electronic component operation determination random number determination process (the big hit determination flag, the small hit determination flag) is not immediately used data and is not necessary thereafter, but a special symbol later. This is because the data is necessary in the variation pattern creation process (step S412) and the special electric accessory process (step S060). When the process of step S424 is completed, the process exits the special electric utility operation determination random number determination process and proceeds to the special stop symbol creation process (step S410) of FIG.

(8-3-2. Special stop symbol creation process (variation start special stop symbol determination process): FIG. 17)
Next, the special stop symbol creation process (step S410) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the details of the special stop symbol creation processing of FIG. ) Or the special figure 2 symbol table selection table (see FIG. 30B) is acquired (step S425).

  Subsequently, the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired (step S426), and the winning lottery result obtained in the random determination processing for determining the special electronic component operation in step S409, that is, the big hit determination flag And a small hit determination flag are acquired (step S427).

  Next, a special stop symbol data creation process is performed (step S428: special stop symbol data creation process of the fluctuation start process). In this special stop symbol data creation process, the symbol table according to the winning lottery result of the random determination process for special electric utility operation determination with reference to the symbol table selection table acquired in step S425 (see FIGS. 31 to 33). And the special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset value corresponding to the special symbol determination random number acquired in step S426 are acquired with reference to the symbol table. Then, with the acquired special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset in the registers (A register, B register, and C register), the special stop symbol data creation processing is exited.

  The special stop symbol data creation process in step S428 is “special stop symbol data creation process in winning process (special stop symbol data creation process in special figure 1 start opening check process (step S322 in FIG. 10), special figure 2 start opening”. The processing content is the same as the special stop symbol data creation processing (step S342 in FIG. 11)) of the check processing. That is, both are configured as a common processing module, and as a result, the same program configuration can be used. As described above, the special stop symbol data creation process of the winning process and the special stop symbol data creation process of the fluctuation start process can be used as a common processing module, thereby providing separate and independent processes (separately) This can contribute to a reduction in the amount of programs and the amount of memory rather than a separate program). In the present embodiment, in addition to the random number determination processing in step S423, the special stop symbol data creation processing in step S428 is also configured to be used as a processing module common to the winning time processing, so further program amount and This contributes to a reduction in the amount of memory and can reduce the control burden.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S428 is exited, the special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset stored in each register are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 (step S429). The RAM 203 is provided with a dedicated storage area for storing these data (special symbol determination data storage region, special symbol stop symbol number storage region, variation pattern selection offset storage region).

  Here, the reason why the data obtained by the special stop symbol data creation processing in step S428 is stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. The data (special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset) obtained in the special stop symbol data generation process of the special stop symbol generation process is a random number determination process for determining the special electric component operation in step S409. Similar to the data obtained in the above, it is not data that is immediately used and is unnecessary thereafter, but is required in the later special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) and the special electric accessory process (step S060). Because it is data. When the process of step S429 is completed, the process exits the special stop symbol creation process and proceeds to the game state transition preparation process (step S411) of FIG.

(8-3-3. Game state transition preparation process: FIG. 18)
Next, the gaming state transition preparation process (step S411) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first acquires a jackpot determination flag and determines the state of the jackpot determination flag (step S431). If the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S431: ≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything.

  When the big hit determination flag is ON (= 5 AH) (step S431: = 5 AH), a big hit gaming state transition table selection table is acquired (step S432).

  Next, with reference to the acquired gaming state transition table selection table, a big hit gaming state transition table corresponding to the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the big hit type (special symbol determination data) is acquired (step S433).

(T-8. Big hit game state transition table selection table: FIG. 39)
FIG. 39 shows a big hit gaming state transition table selection table. The jackpot gaming state transition table selection table of this embodiment includes a plurality of types of gaming state transition tables (“JTTBL-B1”, “JTTBL-B2”) associated with the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data. ": Refer to FIG. 40 described later). Specifically, based on the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data, any one of the big hit gaming state transition tables is determined. ing.

  Here, the “gaming state determination number (YJ)” is data for identifying the internal gaming state. Referring to the variation pattern allocation designation number table of FIG. 49, when the game state determination number (YJ) is “00H”, “normal game state (no power support state, low probability)” is set to “01H "" Indicates a latent state (without electric support, high accuracy) ", and" 02H "indicates" probability change state (with electric support, high accuracy) ". Therefore, the game state determination number (YJ) is different from the data for identifying the game state itself, such as the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode), in that it identifies the internal game state as described above.

(T-9. Game state transition table for jackpot: FIG. 40)
FIG. 40 shows the above jackpot gaming state transition table. The jackpot gaming state transition table of this embodiment includes “JTTBL-1” and “JTTBL-2”. In these jackpot game state transition tables, a plurality of types of data groups for designating a game state (in the present embodiment, an internal game state) to be transitioned after the jackpot game is defined. Specifically, the utility power release extended transition buffer, normal symbol short transition buffer, normal symbol likelihood transition buffer, special symbol short transition transition buffer, special symbol probability transition transition buffer, special symbol short transition counter buffer Various data to be stored in the special symbol probability variation counter buffer, the variation pattern allocation designation number buffer, and the special symbol variation count counter buffer are defined. The values stored in these buffers are read at a necessary timing and set in a predetermined flag storage area or a predetermined counter storage area provided in the RAM 203. When various data specified by each game state transition table are stored in each buffer, the game state after the big hit game is determined. In this embodiment, “JTTBL-B1” is a gaming state transition table for shifting to a “probability change state” and “JTTBL-B2” is a “latency probability state”. The role of the various buffers described above will be described below.

(General power utility opening extension transition state buffer)
The “general utility release extension transition state buffer” is used to set a general utility release extension state flag. The “general utility release extension state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the release extension function. When the flag is ON (= 5 AH), The state is “present state”, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the open extension function is inactive and “no electric support” state.

(Normal symbol short transition buffer)
The “normal symbol short time transition state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol short time state flag. The “ordinary symbol short time state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the normal symbol short time function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “normal symbol short time state flag” indicating that the normal symbol short time function is in operation. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the normal symbol short function is not activated and the" normal symbol non-short state ".

(Normal symbol change transition buffer)
The “normal symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol probability change state flag. The “normal symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating an auxiliary lottery probability state, that is, an operating state of the normal symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the normal symbol probability changing function is set. It indicates that the state is the “probability change state per assistance” during operation, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that it is a “low probability state per assistance” in which the normal symbol probability change function is not activated.

(Special symbol short state transition state buffer)
The “special symbol short time state transition state buffer” is used for setting a special symbol short time state flag. The “special symbol short time state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the special symbol short time function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “special symbol short time state flag” during the special symbol short time function is operating. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol non-time-short state is inactive.

(Special Symbol Probability Transition Status Buffer)
The “special symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability change state flag. The “special symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol probability changing function is not activated in a “low probability state”.

(Special design short time counter buffer)
The “special symbol short time counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol short time counter. The above “special symbol time reduction counter” means the number of remaining times until the operation of the “special symbol time reduction function” is terminated due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game). It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the end. It is a counter for counting. In the present embodiment, with the end of the special symbol short-time state, the high base gaming state, which is in the state of electrical support, is also ended (see step S481 in FIG. 21B).

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol probability variation counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability variation counter. The above “special symbol probability change counter” means the remaining number of times until the operation of the “special symbol probability change function” is finished, that is, the “high probability state” is ended due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game). It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the number of times (remaining ST number).

(Variation pattern distribution specification number buffer)
The “variation pattern allocation designation number buffer” is used to set a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode). This variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is set in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area of the RAM 203.

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol variation number counter buffer” is used for setting a special symbol variation number counter. The “special symbol variation counter” is a counter for counting the number of times of variation of a special symbol that is a gaming state transition condition (hereinafter referred to as “the prescribed number of gaming state transitions”). In the present embodiment, for example, when “small hit C” or “2R short open latency probability change big hit” is won, the game state transition specified number of times of “normal C” to “normal A” is 30 times. Is set.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 18 again, the CPU 201 performs a state buffer setting process after the process of step S433 (step S434). In this state buffer setting process, referring to the gaming state transition table acquired in the process of step S433, the general utility release extended transition state buffer, normal symbol time transition state buffer, normal symbol probability transition state buffer, special symbol time reduction State transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol time change count buffer, special symbol probability change count counter buffer, variation pattern allocation designation number buffer, and special symbol variation count counter buffer Store the data specified in the table. The values stored in these buffers are read out in the process of step S509 during the jackpot ending process in FIG. 22 described later, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 203 (a flag storage area or a counter storage area corresponding to each buffer). Stored. Thereby, the game state transition preparation process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) in FIG.

(8-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern creation processing (variation pattern creation processing at the start of variation): FIG. 19)
Next, the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation pattern creation processing of FIG.

  In this special symbol variation pattern creation processing, a variation pattern designation command for determining and creating a variation pattern of a special symbol (variation pattern at the start of variation) (steps S441 to S449), and a variation pattern designation command The process is mainly configured to transmit to the effect control unit 24 (step S450).

In the process of determining the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the special symbol,
(A) Referring to the variation pattern distribution table selection table (see FIG. 42), the first layer of the variation pattern distribution table according to the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) (FIG. 43). , See FIG. 44), “variation pattern distribution table first layer determination process (steps S441 to S443)”;
(B) With reference to the first hierarchy of the fluctuation pattern distribution table, the fluctuation start command data 1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper byte side (MODE) data of the fluctuation pattern designation command) and the fluctuation pattern distribution A “variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy determination process (steps S444 to S445)” for determining the minute table second hierarchy;
(C) Referring to the second hierarchy of the variation pattern distribution table, variation start command data 2 (lower byte (EVENT) data of variation pattern designation command) corresponding to variation pattern random number 2 and variation time table (Variation pattern determination processing (steps S446 to S447)) for determining (not shown);
(D) “Special symbol variation time setting process (step S448) for determining the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation time table,
(E) A “variation pattern designation command creation process (step S449)” for creating a variation pattern designation command based on the variation start command data 1 and the variation start command data 2 is included.

  Although the details will be described later, the “variation pattern distribution table selection table” is data used when the “variation pattern distribution table first layer” is determined. The “variation pattern distribution table first layer” is data used when determining the variation start command data 1 and the variation pattern distribution table second layer. The “fluctuation pattern distribution table second layer” is data used when determining the fluctuation start command data 2 and the fluctuation time table. Furthermore, the “variation time table” is data used when determining the variation time (variation display operation time) of a special symbol.

  The “variation start command data 1” designates a “basic pattern” (including whether or not a hit is lost), which is the gist (base) of a special symbol variation pattern (variation pattern at the start of variation). Yes, it is data on the upper byte side (MODE) of the variation pattern designation command. The “variation start command data 2” is for designating the “detail pattern” which is the specific content of the basic pattern, and is data on the lower byte side (EVENT) of the variation pattern designation command. . Therefore, the “variation pattern designation command” for designating the variation pattern at the start of variation is composed of 2-byte control data consisting of “variation start command data 1 (MODE)” and “variation start command data 2 (EVENT)”. Is done. When this change pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 side grasps the change pattern at the start of change (the change pattern of the special symbol). Here, the above-mentioned “basic pattern” refers to a “variation pattern type” (for example, “weak SP”) in which a plurality of types of variation patterns are focused on the characteristics of the variation mode and grouped together. “Reach A” type, “weak SP reach B” type, etc.), and “detailed pattern” means a “variation pattern type” (for example, “weak SP reach A1 to 1” included in the basic pattern (variation pattern type)). A3 ”and“ variation patterns such as “weak SP reach B1 to B3”). Note that “change start command data 1 (MODE)” of the present embodiment is the same value “A0H” regardless of the change pattern type, for example, in the case of a loss (see FIG. 44). According to the combination with “start command data 2 (EVENT)”, the type of variation and the type of variation are determined. In other words, “variation start command data 1 (MODE)” may also have a role as data that can specify a basic pattern, or a specific big hit (2R short open latency probability change big hit or small like this embodiment). For example, “A1H” in the case of “winning”, “A2H” in the case of other big hits, “A0H” in the case of losing, etc.

  Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, an outline of a procedure for determining a variation pattern at the start of variation in the present embodiment will be described. The CPU 201 determines the “variation pattern distribution table first layer” by the “variation pattern distribution table selection table”, and then refers to the “variation pattern distribution table first layer” to obtain the random number 1 for the variation pattern. The “variation pattern type (basic pattern)” is determined by the lottery process used (steps S441 to S445). At this time, the “variation pattern distribution table second layer” for determining the “variation pattern type (detailed pattern)” is also determined. Next, referring to the “floating pattern distribution table second layer”, the “variation pattern type” included in the variation pattern type is determined by lottery processing using the random number 2 for variation pattern (steps S446 to S447). . In other words, in the present embodiment, a hierarchical process having a hierarchical structure such as the first hierarchy and the second hierarchy and using a hierarchical process executed in order from the first hierarchy is used to sequentially determine a plurality of types of random numbers for variation patterns. As a result, the target fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is determined.

  In the present embodiment, “two-level processing” is shown in which “variation pattern type” is determined in the first layer, and “variation pattern type” that is the specific content is determined in the second layer. However, when n (2 ≦ n) fluctuation pattern random numbers are acquired, an n-layer process may be executed. For example, when three types of random numbers 1 to 3 for the variation pattern are acquired, in the first hierarchy, the variation pattern type higher than the variation pattern type of the present embodiment (for example, “weak SP”). The 'weak SP reach' type, which combines the 'reach A' type and the 'weak SP reach B' type as the fluctuation pattern type of the same system, and the 'strong SP reach A' type and the 'strong SP reach B' type The “strong SP reach” type or the like collected as the fluctuation pattern type is determined, and in the second layer, the fluctuation pattern type (for example, “weak SP reach” type included in the higher-level fluctuation pattern type is determined. If so, the “weak SP reach A” type and the “weak SP reach B” type) are determined, and in the third layer, the type of variation pattern included in the variation pattern type determined in the second layer It is possible to adopt a "three-hierarchical processing," such as determining the. Such a hierarchical process is effective when the types of variation patterns are to be abundant and the processing becomes complicated if only one type of variation pattern random number is determined. When predicting a variation pattern at the start of variation in the prefetch determination, the outline of the variation pattern type can be determined using the same variation pattern random number (variation pattern random value 1) as in this embodiment. Is also effective.

  The information regarding the variation pattern determined in this way is transmitted from the main control unit 20 side to the effect control unit 24 side by a “variation pattern designation command” that allows the content to be specified. On the side of the effect control unit 24, the main effect scenario developed during the current symbol variation display game is determined based on the contents of the variation pattern designation command. Hereinafter, the processing methods (A) to (E) will be specifically described.

(A) Fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy determination process (steps S441 to S443)
In FIG. 19, the CPU 201 first corrects the variation pattern selection offset value obtained by the special stop symbol creation processing in step S410 (step S441: variation start selection variation pattern selection offset correction processing). Here, it is obtained in the special stop symbol creation process as data for selecting the first level of the variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 43 and 44) from the variation pattern distribution table selection table (FIG. 42) described later. A predetermined correction process is performed on the obtained variation pattern selection offset value, and a process of acquiring a new variation pattern selection offset value is performed.

  As already described, the variation pattern selection offset value before the correction processing in step S441 shown in FIG. 41 (a) (the offset value before correction at the start of variation) is performed in the winning time processing shown in FIG. 34 (a). It takes the same value as the obtained variation pattern selection offset value (offset value before correction at the time of winning). It is necessary to correct it. The processing related to this correction is the variation start time variation pattern selection offset correction processing in step S411.

  With reference to FIG. 41, the offset correction processing for selecting a variation pattern at the start of variation in step S441 will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the “variation start time variation pattern selection offset correction process” in step S441. FIG. 41 (a) shows the special stop symbol creation process (step S410 in FIG. 15). A list of fluctuation pattern selection offset values (hereinafter referred to as “offset values before correction at the start of fluctuation”) and their contents are shown in FIG. And a list of the contents thereof.

  41 (a), for example, when the offset value before correction at the start of change is “00H”, the winning lottery (step S409 in FIG. 15) and the symbol lottery ( The determination result based on (Step S410 in FIG. 15) is “Lose A”, and the number of the special figure 1 operation holding balls at the start of the fluctuation indicates “0” (in the figure, “hold 0” to “hold 4” are Indicates the number of active balls at the start of the change). Further, for example, when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning is “04H”, the determination result based on the winning lottery and the symbol lottery at the start of the fluctuation for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is “losing A”, Special figure 2 The number of actuated balls is “0”, and the other is the variation pattern selection offset value obtained by the special stop symbol creation process and its contents (the symbol table shown in FIGS. 31 to 33). (Refer to the “Offset value” column).

  Here, the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning (see FIG. 34 (a)) and the pre-correction offset value at the start of variation (see FIG. 41 (a)) are common offset values. , “Process for correcting to an offset value for selecting a variation pattern according to the number of suspended balls” is performed. Specifically, the offset values 01H to 03H and 05H to 07H, which are vacant numbers, are added to the offset value “00H” or “04H” before correction at the start of the fluctuation, so that the offset values 01H to 03H and 05H to 07H, which are empty numbers, The number is corrected to an offset value corresponding to the number.

  Specifically, in the correction process in step S441, the special symbol operation confirmation data is confirmed. If the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side is the special symbol 1, the current special value is set to the offset value “00H” before the fluctuation start correction. 1 is added, and when the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side is special symbol 2, the current special figure 2 active ball is added to the offset value “04H” before fluctuation start correction. (Step S441). However, the “current number of pending balls for operation” to be added is the number of pending balls for operation that presupposes that the reserved balls for the current variable display operation will be digested. This is the number of active suspension balls obtained by the subtraction process in step S403 of FIG.

  The fluctuation pattern selection offset value (offset value after fluctuation start correction) obtained by this correction process and its contents are as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, this offset value is used to select the desired “variation pattern distribution table first layer” from the variation pattern distribution table selection table (steps S441 to S443).

  When the correction process in step S441 is completed, a variation pattern distribution table selection table is acquired (step S442), and the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation corrected in step S441 are referred to the variation pattern distribution table selection table. The variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy corresponding to the pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is acquired (step S443).

(T-10. Fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table: FIG. 42)
FIG. 42 shows a variation pattern distribution table selection table. In the variation pattern distribution table selection table of this embodiment, a plurality of types of variation pattern distribution table first layers associated with variation pattern selection offsets and variation pattern distribution designation numbers (Tcode) are defined. . Specifically, based on the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), any one of the plurality of types of variation pattern distribution table first layer (H1 to H12, A1 to A6) is selected. One variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy is determined.

  The variation pattern distribution table selection table has the same basic configuration as the winning command distribution table selection table of FIG. That is, the winning command distribution table selection table stores the address value of the first level of the variation pattern distribution table according to the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode). In order to reduce the memory capacity and simplify the program, the data structure uses continuous addresses so as to correspond to the offset value for selecting the variation pattern. The selection of the first layer of the variation pattern distribution table is performed by first selecting a variation pattern distribution table selection table corresponding to the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) and then varying the pattern distribution according to the variation pattern selection offset value. Select the first table hierarchy. That is, in the variation pattern distribution table selection table selected for each variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), the top address value that defines the first layer of the variation pattern distribution table is described. Then, the variation pattern selection offset value acquired in step S441 is added to obtain a relative address with respect to the head address, and the address value of the target variation pattern distribution table first layer is specified, so that the variation pattern distribution The first level of the table can be selected.

  Here, when the variation of the notice effect during the symbol variation display game is to be abundant, it is possible to select the variation pattern of the special symbol according to the gaming state and the number of suspended balls, of course, to further increase the gameability. In order to increase the number, it is possible to select a special symbol variation pattern that takes into account the number of reserved balls in one game state, and the special symbol variation pattern in another game state without considering the number of active reserve balls. It is desired to have a variety of gameplay that allows selection.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern distribution table selection table is defined as follows. Of the variation pattern allocation table selection tables, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) “00H” or “01H”, that is, the variation pattern allocation table selection table of “normal A” or “normal B” has the same winning type. Even so, the first variation layer of the variation pattern distribution table that is different depending on the number of suspended balls is selected (see the column of offset values 00H to 04H), while the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) “ In the variation pattern distribution table selection table of “02H”, that is, “normal C”, the same first variation pattern distribution table first layer is selected regardless of the number of active balls. In other words, in the variation pattern distribution table selection table of “normal A” or “normal B”, different table data (variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H1 to H4) is stored in the memory area corresponding to the operation holding ball. In the “normal C” variation pattern distribution table selection table, the same table data (variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H9) is stored in the memory area corresponding to the operation-pending ball.

  Here, the number of table data stored in the variation pattern distribution table selection table corresponding to each gaming state (variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)) (the number of the first layer of the variation pattern distribution table) If they are different, a variation pattern selection offset value corresponding to each gaming state must be provided, which complicates the processing and increases the control burden. Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of table data stored in the variation pattern distribution table selection table for each gaming state is the same, and there is no need to separately define a variation pattern selection offset value corresponding to each gaming state. , Reduce the control burden.

(B) Fluctuation pattern distribution table second hierarchy determination process (steps S444 to S445)
After obtaining the variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy in the process of step S443, the CPU 201 obtains the variation pattern random value 1 stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM 203 (step S444), and the variation pattern. By referring to the distribution table first layer, “variation start command data 1” and “variation pattern distribution table second layer” corresponding to random number 1 for variation pattern are acquired (step S445).

(T-11. Fluctuation pattern distribution table first layer: FIGS. 43 and 44)
With reference to FIGS. 43 to 44, the first hierarchy of the variation pattern distribution table will be described. FIG. 43 shows the first level of the hit variation pattern distribution table selected at the time of hitting, and FIG. 44 shows the first level of the shift variation pattern allocation table selected at the time of loss.

  As shown in the drawing, the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy includes a plurality of types of hit fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy “A1 to A6”, and the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy includes A plurality of types of loss variation pattern distribution table first layers H1 to H12 are included. The first layer of the variation pattern distribution table is mainly used for determining the variation pattern type.

  Each variation pattern distribution table first layer is associated with a variation pattern random value 1, a variation start command data 1 and a determination region (determination value) for determining the second variation pattern distribution table layer. More specifically, the variation start command data 1 and the variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy are determined depending on which determination value the variation pattern random value 1 belongs to. ing. In the figure, as in the case of the winning command distribution table already described, the determination value is omitted and only the selection rate is shown.

  Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, the relationship between the first layer of the variation pattern distribution table and the winning command distribution table (the relationship between the prefetch variation pattern and the basic pattern) will be described.

  Comparison of the above-mentioned winning variation pattern distribution table first level (FIG. 43) used in the variation start processing and the winning command distribution table (FIG. 36) used in the winning processing (prefetch determination). In this case, the “hit variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy A1 to A6” and the “winning winning command distribution tables a1 to a6” use the same random number value 1 for the variation pattern and use the same variation pattern contents (basic pattern). And the contents of the look-ahead variation pattern) are determined, and the determination values for determining the variation pattern are configured to match in each table. Specifically, for example, referring to the hit variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy A2 in FIG. 43, the content of the variation pattern random value 1 is in the range of the determination values 0 to 49 (distribution). “Weak SP reach A” is selected when it belongs to the value “50” description column), and “strong SP reach” is selected when it belongs to the range of the judgment values 50 to 129 (description column of the distribution value “80”). If “A” is selected and belongs to the range of determination values 130 to 168 (corresponding to the description column of the distribution value “39”), “weak SP reach B” is selected and the range of determination values 169 to 238 (distribution) In the case of belonging to the value “80” column), “strong SP reach B” is selected. On the other hand, referring to the winning prize command distribution table a2 in FIG. 36, the content is that the random number for variation pattern 1 is in the range of determination values 0 to 49 (corresponding to the description column of the distribution value “50”). “Weak SP reach A” is selected if it belongs, and “strong SP reach A” is selected if it belongs to the range of determination values 50 to 129 (corresponding to the column for the distribution value “80”). If it belongs to the range of 130 to 168 (corresponding to the description column of the distribution value “39”), “weak SP reach B” is selected, and the range of the determination values 169 to 238 (the description of the distribution value “80” is described). (Corresponding to the column) indicates that “strong SP reach B” is selected (similar to the other). That is, there is a discrepancy between the look-ahead variation pattern for one activated ball and the variation pattern of the special symbol when the activated ball is actually subjected to the variation display operation (variation pattern at the beginning of variation). (See the “prefetching variation pattern designation content” column in FIGS. 35 and 36, and the “first hierarchy determination content” column in FIGS. 42 and 43).

  The reason for this is as follows. In relation to the production control, at the time of winning (at the time of prefetch determination), the main control unit 20 sends a “hold addition command” including prefetch fluctuation pattern information to the production control unit 24, and the production control unit 24 receiving this sends the hold. Based on the addition command, effect control relating to the pre-reading notice effect is performed. On the other hand, at the start of change, the main control unit 20 sends the change pattern designation command including change pattern information at the start of change to the effect control unit 24. Upon receiving the effect control unit 24, the effect control related to the notice effect in the symbol variation display game is performed based on the variation pattern designation command. For this reason, if the information about the prefetch variation pattern received by the production control unit 24 and the information about the basic pattern of the variation pattern at the start of the variation do not match, the contents of the prefetch announcement effect and the symbol variation display game The content of the notice effect will be inconsistent, and not only will the significance of providing the pre-read notice effect be lost, but it will also cause distrust to the gaming machine and reduce the player's willingness to play. It is. As such a case, for example, the hold display relating to the pre-reading notice effect changes to a lustrous “rainbow” and the “predictive pre-reading notice effect” that informs the jackpot winning is confirmed. There is a case where the result of the symbol variation display game for the operation holding ball becomes “losing”. If such cases occur frequently, distrust of the gaming machine may be caused, and the player's willingness to play may be reduced.

  For the above reason, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead variation pattern and the basic pattern at the start of variation are closely related to each other, and when the production control unit 24 determines these productions, both contents are inconsistent as much as possible. I try not to let you.

  However, as an exceptional production mode, a production mode in which “the content of the pre-reading notice effect ≠ the content of the basic pattern”, that is, a production mode in which a contradiction may occur that “the content of the pre-reading variation pattern ≠ the content of the variation pattern at the start of variation” (Contradiction effect) may be included. For example, even if the hold display related to the pre-reading notice effect is a “red” display that increases the expectation of winning a big hit, during the symbol variation display game for the operation holding ball, there is no hot notice effect. If the “red” display is, for example, “SP reach confirmation” hold display, the target action ball is the target. An example of such an effect is that the N reach is made to appear during the symbol variation display game. In order to prevent the player from feeling distrust due to the contradiction, such a performance mode is selected with a very low probability in the case of a loss, and most of them are selected only in the case of a big win. It is preferable to select only when winning a big hit. In this way, when the contradictory effect occurs, the contradictory effect can be made to function as a kind of premium effect such that the degree of expectation for winning the big hit is extremely increased or the big win winning decision is notified. The “contradiction effect” as described above is effective in enhancing the fun of the game in that the result is contrary to the expectation after deceiving the player temporarily.

  In the case of a loss, as in the case of the hit described above, the look-ahead variation pattern and the basic pattern at the start of variation are closely related, and when the production control unit 24 determines these productions, The content is not contradicted.

  Specifically, the loss variation pattern distribution table first layer (FIG. 44) used in the variation start process and the lose prize command distribution table (FIG. 37) used in the winning process (prefetch determination) are shown. In comparison, the contents of the basic pattern determined in accordance with the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H1, H5 to H12 and the determination value for determining the basic pattern are the lost prize command In the distribution tables h1 to h9, the contents of the prefetch fluctuation pattern determined according to the random number 1 for fluctuation pattern and the determination value for determining the prefetch fluctuation pattern are used. As in the case of winning as described above, the contents of both of the look-ahead variation pattern and the basic pattern at the start of variation are closely related to each other when the production control unit 24 determines these productions. (See the “prefetching variation pattern designation content” column in FIGS. 35 and 37, and the “first layer determination content” column in FIGS. 42 and 44). Note that the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H2 to H4 does not correspond to any of the loss winning command distribution tables, but in the case of “Special Figure 1 Loss A”, the operation holding ball The content of the basic pattern that can be selected here is the same as that of the first step H1 of the loss variation pattern distribution table, and only the selection rate is different. Loss fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H2 to H4, the pre-read fluctuation pattern and the basics at the start of fluctuation due to the presence of “indefinite (normal fluctuation pattern or fluctuation pattern designation with reach)” in the loss winning command distribution table h1. It is related to the pattern so that no problems occur.

  Note that the first level of the loss variation pattern distribution table of the present embodiment includes the following characteristic elements. Focusing on the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H5, H7, these are all selected in the case of “Special Figure 1 Loss B”. The loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H5 The “normal A” and loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H5 is selected in the case of “normal B” (see FIG. 42). Here, referring to FIG. 44, one of the two basic patterns (weak SP reach A or strong SP reach A) is selected as one basic pattern, Each selectivity is different. Specifically, in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H5, the weak SP reach A has a relatively higher selection rate than the strong SP reach A, and the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H5. On the contrary, in H7, the strong SP reach A has a higher selectivity than the strong SP reach A.

  When attention is paid to the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H6, H8, these are all selected in the case of “Special Figure 1 Loss C”, and the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy. H6 is selected when “normal A” and the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H8 is “normal B” (see FIG. 42). Here, referring to FIG. 44, both of the basic patterns (weak SP reach B or strong SP reach B) are selected from any one of the basic patterns. Each selectivity is different. Specifically, in the loss variation pattern distribution table first layer H6, the weak SP reach B has a relatively higher selection rate than the strong SP reach B, and the loss variation pattern distribution table first layer H6. On the contrary, in H8, the strong SP reach B has a higher selectivity than the strong SP reach B.

  This is the appearance of a reach production with a relatively high chance of winning a big hit when winning wins B and C during “normal B” compared to winning wins B and C during “normal A” This means that the rate increases, and in the present embodiment, the “normal B” is more likely to win the big win than the “normal A”, in other words, the “normal B” Opportunities to give the player a sense of expectation for winning the jackpot can be relatively increased. As a result, when the player is in the “normal B” state, the player can be given more sense of winning big wins, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  However, when viewed from the player side, the internal gaming state may be clearly recognized as being “normal B” in the normal gaming state. In this case, it is considered that even if the appearance rate of the reach effect in which the winning expectation for the big hit is relatively increased, the player's feeling of uplifting is not so much increased.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the above-described problem is solved by enabling the transition to “normal B” while keeping the internal gaming state secret. For example, if the gaming state is (I) small win B, C winning → “normal C (normal gaming state)” → reaching the normal number of transitions to normal A → “normal A (normal gaming state)” → small winning A winning → When transitioning to “normal B (normal game state)”, (II) 2R short-open latent probability change big win win → “normal C (latent state)” → reaching the normal number of transitions to normal A → “normal A ( The case of transition from “latent probability state)” → small win A winning → “normal B (latent state)” will be described as a representative example.

  The route won in the 2R short open latency change big hit in (II) above, even if it shifts to “normal B (normal game state)” via the route won in the small hits B and C in (I) above. Even if the game state is changed to “normal B (latency probability state)”, the player can grasp that the current game state is “normal B”. Since the internal gaming state is concealed due to the relationship between the behavior and the behavior of the 2R latent probability variation big hit game and the presence of the transition control to “normal C”, the current internal gaming state cannot be accurately grasped. . As a result, “normal B” in which the internal gaming state is unknown as shown in the above (I) and (II), compared to the case where the internal gaming state is clearly understood as being in “normal B” of the normal gaming state. When a reach production with a high degree of expectation for winning a big hit appears in the middle, the sense of expectation that “there may be a latent state at present, and this may be a big hit with this reach” increases. When the internal gaming state is concealed, providing a gaming state that increases the chances of winning the winning expectation by increasing the appearance rate of reach production with a high degree of expectation of winning a big win increases the fun of the game Above, it has significant significance.

(C) Fluctuation pattern determination process (steps S446 to S447)
Next, the variation pattern determination process (steps S446 to S447) will be described. After obtaining the fluctuation start command data 1 and the fluctuation pattern distribution table second hierarchy in the process of step S445, the CPU 201 obtains the fluctuation pattern random value 2 stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM 203 (step S445). S446) Referring to the second hierarchy of the variation pattern distribution table, the “variation start command data 2” and the “variation time table” corresponding to the variation pattern random value 2 are acquired (step S447).

(T-12. Fluctuation pattern distribution table second layer: FIGS. 45 and 46)
With reference to FIGS. 45 and 46, the second hierarchy of the variation pattern distribution table will be described. 45 shows a “hit fluctuation pattern distribution table second hierarchy” selected by the first hierarchy of the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table, and FIG. The minute table second hierarchy "is shown.

  As shown in the drawing, the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table second hierarchy of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of hit fluctuation pattern distribution tables second hierarchy AA1 to AA9. Further, the second level of the loss variation pattern distribution table includes a plurality of types of loss variation pattern distribution tables second levels HH1 to HH12. These second variation pattern distribution table layers are mainly used to identify individual variation patterns included in the variation pattern types determined in the first variation pattern distribution table layer.

  Each variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy includes a variation pattern random number value 2, a variation start command data 2, and a determination region (determination value) for determining a variation time table in association with each other. Specifically, the change start command data 2 and the change time table are determined depending on which determination value the change pattern random value 2 belongs to. In the figure, as in the case of the winning command distribution table (FIGS. 36 and 37) already described, the determination value is omitted and only the selection rate is shown.

  When the “change start command data 2” is determined, the change pattern at the start of change, which is the specific content of the basic pattern, is determined. For example, when the content of the variation start command data 1 determined in the first layer of the variation pattern distribution table is the variation pattern type “weak SP reach A”, it is determined in the second layer of the variation pattern distribution table. The specific content of the “weak SP reach A”, that is, one of “weak SP reach A1 to weak SP reach A3” in the “weak SP reach A” type is determined.

  The “variation time table” includes “TIMTBL-A1 to TIMTBL-A21” determined in the second hierarchy of the hit variation pattern distribution table and the variation time table “determined in the second variation pattern distribution table”. A plurality of types of variation time tables of “TIMTBL-H1 to TIMTBL-H24” are included. When this variation time table is determined, the variation time of the special symbol is determined, and this variation time becomes the execution time of the current symbol variation display game (design game).

  The “variation time table” includes “TIMTBL-A1 to TIMTBL-A21” determined in the second hierarchy of the hit variation pattern distribution table and the variation time table “determined in the second variation pattern distribution table”. A plurality of types of variation time tables of “TIMTBL-H1 to TIMTBL-H24” are included. When this variation time table is determined, the variation time of the special symbol is determined, and this variation time becomes the execution time of the current symbol variation display game (design game).

(Variation pattern related to special symbol 2)
Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following characteristic elements are provided for the special variation pattern (variation pattern on the special symbol 2 side) related to the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 operation holding ball). 42, the variation pattern distribution table selection table in FIG. 43, the first variation pattern distribution table in FIG. 43, the first variation layer in the variation pattern distribution table in FIG. 44, the second variation in the variation pattern distribution table in FIG. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, referring to the variation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 42, “Special Figure 2 Hold 0 Loss A” to “Special Figure 2 Hold 3 Loss A” (offset values “04H” to “07H after correction at the time of change start). )), “Special Figure 2 Loss B” (same offset value “0AH”), and “Special Figure 2 Loss C” (same offset value “0BH”), “Normal A” and “Normal B” ( In the case of the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) “01H” “02H”), only the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H4 is selected. In the case of “normal C”, the loss variation pattern distribution is selected. Only the table first hierarchy H9 is selected.

  For the loss variation pattern distribution table first layers H4 and H9, referring to the first layer of the loss variation pattern distribution table in FIG. 44, the loss variation pattern distribution table first layer H4 has only the “normal variation 3” type. , And the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H9 designates only the “special normal variation” type (normal variation pattern type for normal C). In other words, the “normal A” to “normal C” state is “no electric support”, and the “normal fluctuation pattern” for a non-reach effect that does not go through the reach state in the case of a loss winning in this electric no support state. "Only the type" is specified. For example, when referring to the loss variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy HH3 and HH9 determined by the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H4 and H9, the specific variation pattern is as follows. In the case of “normal A” and “normal B”, “normal fluctuation 3 s (variation time 3 seconds)”, and in the case of “normal C”, “special normal fluctuation 10 s (variation time 10 seconds)”. In the present embodiment, the “normal variation 3” type has a single “normal variation 3 s (variation time 3 seconds), and the“ special normal variation ”type has a single“ special normal variation 10 s (variation time 10 seconds). The present invention is not limited to this. Each variation type may include a plurality of types of normal variation patterns.

  In the present embodiment, as in “normal A” to “normal C”, in the case of a game state with a “no power support state”, the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is established, and the special figure 2 operation is suspended. Prefetch determination for a sphere is prohibited.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal variation pattern is selected for all the variation patterns on the special symbol 2 side in the absence of the electric support, and the prefetch determination for the special symbol 2 operation holding ball is prohibited. The reason for this is as follows.

  For example, only three special figure 1 operation holding balls with normal fluctuation patterns are held, and in this state, there is a winning at the upper start port 34, and a pre-reading advance notice for the fourth special figure 1 operation holding ball is made. The case where the production has started will be described as a representative example (in this embodiment, whether or not the pre-reading notice production is performed is lottered on the condition that there is no reach variation pattern in the old operation holding ball, or the old operation holding is performed. If there is a reach variation pattern in the ball, whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is performed is selected by lottery, but the probability that the pre-reading notice effect is executable is determined to be zero). Here, the above-mentioned “fourth special figure 1 operation holding ball” which has been a target of the pre-reading notice effect will be referred to as “notice target holding ball”.

  In the state where the above-mentioned noticeable holding ball has not yet been digested, when the lower start opening 35 has won a prize and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is generated, the special fluctuation function generated later will give priority to the special figure 2 operation holding ball. Digested. At this time, if the fluctuation pattern related to the special figure 2 actuated holding ball is determined to be a “latch with change fluctuation pattern”, the loss that has no relation to the pre-reading notice effect for the above-mentioned noticeable holding ball will be lost. No. “Reach production” is intervening, and the pre-reading notice production is cut off in the middle. As a result, there is a fear that the function of the pre-reading notice effect is not sufficiently exhibited, and the effect of the effect cannot be fully utilized.

  In view of the above problems, first, when the winning result in the “no power support” state is “lost”, only the “normal variation pattern” is designated as the variation pattern on the special symbol 2 side. Thereby, the said problem can be solved. However, with this alone, a series of 'pre-reading determination' processing related to the winning time processing is executed for the special figure 2 operation holding ball that occurred later, and the control load of the pre-reading notice effect still increases. End up.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, as described above, the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is established in the state without the electric support, and the “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition” is in the state with the electric support. "Condition" is established, and the section (prefetch prohibition state) in which prefetch determination on the special symbol 1 side and special symbol 2 side is prohibited is switched according to the gaming state. Thereby, the control burden regarding the prefetch notice effect can be reduced. If the special figure 2 action holding ball that was generated later was a big hit (including a small hit), the “variable pattern with reach” was selected as the fluctuation pattern on the special symbol 2 side, and the above notice subject The “reach effect” will be intervened during the pre-reading notice effect for the holding ball, but in this case, it will be a big hit as it is, and it will not cause any disadvantage to the player, and the pre-reading notice effect will be cut off. In such a case, it is possible to add an unexpected performance such as winning a big hit, so there is no particular problem. In addition, if “variation pattern with reach” is selected as the fluctuation pattern on the special symbol 2 side during the pre-reading notice effect on the special symbol 1 side, a dedicated reach effect related to the pre-reading notice effect is generated. You may comprise so that it may be made.

In the “probable variation state”, there is a possibility that the variation pattern with reach may be selected for both of the variation patterns on the special symbols 1 and 2 side (for the special symbol 2 side, “Special Diagram 2 Loss B (Variation Loss variation pattern distribution table for designating “reaching during probability variation” of the variation variation pattern with reach in the case of “offset value after correction at start“ 0AH ”) and“ special figure 2 loss C (same offset value “0BH”) ” When the first hierarchy H11 is selected (see FIG. 42 and FIG. 43), the special figure 1 operation holding ball is generated later while the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is generated. Then, even if the fluctuation pattern related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball is the “variation pattern with reach”, the existing special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested by the action of the priority fluctuation function. , Look ahead Without that production is disrupted, no particular problem. In other words, if the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is being generated, there should be at least one special figure 2 operation holding ball. It is because it is not digested.

(About loss variation patterns that can be selected during "Normal C")
Further, the loss variation pattern selected during “normal C” in the present embodiment includes the following characteristic elements. Referring to the column “Normal C” (variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) “02H”) of the variation pattern allocation table selection table in FIG. The loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H9, H10 is selected. However, the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H10 is selected according to the type of loss, and in this embodiment, “Special Figure 1 Loss B” (offset value after variation start correction “08H”), and “Special This is selected in the case of FIG. 1 lose C ”(same offset value“ 09H ”). In addition, as described above, the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H9 designates only the “special normal variation” type (normal variation pattern type for normal C). In general, even if there is no electric support, the number of balls that can be activated can be changed in a relatively short period of time. If there is a change in the number according to the number of active balls to be used, it is possible to select an effect time (design) for each symbol variation display game. The execution time of the variable display game can be changed, and various effects can be generated (as such a gaming state, “normal A” and “normal C” are used in this embodiment. (See FIG. 42 in particular)). However, if the effect time of the symbol variation display game is changed according to the number of suspended balls, the effect time of the symbol variation display game changes frequently in a short period of time, and it spans multiple symbol variation display games. Thus, it may be difficult to continuously develop productions that are closely related (for example, story-style productions tailored to a story).

  In addition, it is highly possible that the number of active holding balls when this symbol variation display game is started and the number of active holding balls when the game is over are different, and the variation pattern of the special symbol changes depending on the number of active holding balls. When doing so, it is not possible to predict the performance time of the next symbol variation display game. In addition, when making the above narrative effect appear, it is conceivable to use a pre-reading notice effect. However, a continuous notice effect such as a pre-reading notice effect is a continuous notice effect that targets an existing active ball. Therefore, the number of times is limited up to the maximum number of reserved storage (in this embodiment, 4 times). That is, the problem is that, firstly, there is a possibility that the production time will change for each symbol variation display game, and secondly, the above-mentioned close relationship is exceeded beyond the maximum number of games of 4 times. The point that the production which it has cannot be shown is mentioned.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of the length of the production time as much as possible, a specific gaming state (usually C) in which the variation pattern is selected regardless of the number of the operation-pending balls is provided, and the specific gaming state By setting the number of times of continuation (number of symbol variation display games (number of variations of special symbols)) to a number exceeding at least the maximum number of reserved memories, it is possible to easily develop such a narrative style effect for a long period of time. I am doing so. In particular, “Normal C” in this embodiment works as a gaming state in which the jackpot lottery probability can be concealed, so that in such a gaming state, the expectation of a high probability state can be obtained over a relatively long number of games. Developing a narrative-like production is extremely effective in improving the fun of the game. In the case of ST machines, in order to leave the player with a high probability of expectation, if “normal C” is repeated S times and the specified ST number is T times, “maximum number of reserved memories (4 times) It is preferable to satisfy the relationship <S ≦ T ”. More preferably, “the maximum number of reserved memories (4 times) <S <T”. In the case of the above “maximum reserved storage number (4 times) <S <T”, “normal C” ends and “normal A” is shifted to before “normal ST” ends, but from “normal C” Even after shifting to “normal A”, the expectation of the high probability state remains until the above-mentioned prescribed number of STs is completed. The reason is that the player cannot accurately know the internal gaming state. Therefore, even if the transition from “normal C” to “normal A” in the low probability state is made, the player will enjoy the game with an expectation of the high probability state until the specified number of STs is completed. It becomes like this. As a result, it is possible to increase the operating rate of the gaming machine, rather than having a relationship of “maximum reserved storage number (4 times) <S = T”.

  In this embodiment, in the case of “Special Figure 1 Loss B” or “Special Figure 1 Loss C” in normal C, the “special reach” type of the variation pattern with reach (variation pattern type with reach for normal C) is set. (See the column of “variation pattern distribution table first layer H10” in FIGS. 42 and 44). However, in the case of a loss in “normal C”, a configuration with no reach variation pattern may be selected, and only a “special normal variation 10 s” that is a normal variation pattern may be selected. In this way, when a loss is won, only the “special normal fluctuation 10s” having the same fluctuation pattern is selected each time, regardless of the number of suspended balls and the type of loss. As a result, as long as the game continues to win, the game progresses while the execution time of the symbol variation display game for each time, that is, the production time has the same time width, so in developing the narrative-like production, Placed under active gaming conditions. Also, in the case of a big win, a specific performance (for example, special reach 1 to 3) specified by the hit fluctuation pattern can be generated. When a special effect such as an epilogue effect (in this case, an aspect of a reach effect based on special reach 1 to 3) occurs, a big win winning decision (may include a small win) can be notified. Become. In addition, the above “story-style production” is, for example, a “combat production (fighting production where the enemy falls when winning a big hit. Defeat production that receives an attack from the enemy when winning a win)” ”Or“ Storyline production (when the big hit is won, the final story production of the last story of the story, and when the loser is won, the story continues) ” Gives a predetermined command to the player every time the game is executed. “Direction effect (for example, with a button notice effect,“ Press the frame effect button 13 to defeat the enemy! ”) Achievement effect.If win is lost, there is no particular limitation as long as some story development is made, such as an instruction unachieved effect in which the enemy remains))).

(D) Special symbol variation time setting process (step S448)
Returning to the description of FIG. 19 again, the special symbol variation time setting process (S448) will be described next. After obtaining the variation time table in the process of step S447, the CPU 201 refers to the obtained variation time table and stores the variation time of the special symbol in the “special symbol accessory operation timer” (step S448). The “special symbol accessory operation timer” is one of timer management areas in the RAM 203 that manages timers related to game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a timer management area, there are a special symbol determination timer, which will be described later, in addition to the special symbol accessory operation timer.

(E) Fluctuation pattern designation command creation processing (step S449)
Next, based on the “variation start command data 1” acquired in the process of step S445 and the “variation start command data 2” acquired in the process of step S447, a “variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern at the start of the variation” "Is created (step S449).

  Then, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S450: variation pattern designation command transmission process). As a result, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is exited and the process proceeds to step S413 in FIG.

(C-2: Variation pattern designation command list: FIGS. 47 and 48)
47 and 48 show a list of variation pattern designation commands created by the variation pattern designation command creation processing in step S449. 47 shows a list of hit variation pattern designation commands, and FIG. 48 is a list showing a list of loss variation pattern designation commands.

  The “variation pattern designation command” is one of the production control commands, and is composed of 2 bytes. The variation pattern designation command of this embodiment includes a plurality of types of commands, “variation patterns A1 to A21” as hit variation pattern designation commands and “variation patterns H1 to H24” as loss variation pattern designation commands. When this variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the decorative design designation command is transmitted (step S415 in FIG. 15). Upon receiving these commands, the effect control unit 24 determines an effect that appears in the current symbol variation display game based on information included in each command, and performs an effect control process based on the effect. Thus, an effect during the symbol variation display game is realized.

  Next, with reference to the list of loss variation pattern designation commands in FIG. 48, the gaming state viewed from the viewpoint of the variation time defined for various variation patterns will be described.

  The normal variation pattern of the present embodiment includes “normal variation 12s (variation time 12 seconds)” (variation pattern H1) and “normal variation 8s (variation time 8) that can be selected during“ normal A ”or“ normal B ”. Second) "(variation pattern H2), and" normal variation 3s (variation time 3 seconds) "(variation pattern H3)," special normal variation (variation time 10 seconds) "(variation pattern) that can be selected during 'normal C' H17), and “normal fluctuation 2s during fluctuation (2 seconds of fluctuation)” (fluctuation pattern H21) that can be selected during the “probability change state”.

(D-1: High-speed fluctuation state)
Of these normal variation patterns, attention is paid to “normal variation 2s during probability variation”. This “normal variation 2s during probability change” is a variation pattern in which a relatively short variation time is defined, and in this embodiment, the variation pattern in which the shortest variation time is defined among all variation patterns. . Here, in the loss variation pattern in the “probability variation state”, the “normal variation 2s during probability variation” that is a single variation pattern is set, and the “winning loss A” has the highest winning probability among the loss types. This is the normal variation pattern selected. Therefore, in the case of the loss winning in the “probable change state”, a high-speed fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time width of the special symbol is “2 seconds” is selected with high probability. That is, during the probability variation state, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game (the average time of the symbol variation display game per game, or the time of the symbol variation display game per unit time) is larger than that of other probability variation states. It is placed under a “high-speed fluctuation state” that becomes relatively short.

  Such “high-speed fluctuating state” is mainly useful in a gaming state in which importance is placed on the game characteristics such as “increase the average digestion speed of the game and increase the time efficiency regarding the progress of the game”. In particular, during the probabilistic state, the game state has been devised to improve the game digestion speed per unit time and make it easier to win big hits. Become. When placed under such a gaming state, there are many players who want to get a big hit faster than enjoying the production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the “high-speed fluctuation state” is generated when the probability variation state is in effect. If the “short time state” is configured to be generated, the lottery lottery probability is in a low probability state, but the lottery number improvement state becomes “electric support support state + special symbol short time state”. Also in this case, the “high-speed fluctuation state” may be generated in the same manner as the “probability change state” described above.

(D-2: Low speed fluctuation state)
For the above "high-speed fluctuation state", multiple types of fluctuation patterns with relatively long fluctuation times such as "normal fluctuation 12s (fluctuation time 12 seconds)" and "normal fluctuation 8s (fluctuation time 8 seconds)" are selected. In a game state that is likely to be played, the game is placed under a “low-speed fluctuation state” in which the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game is relatively long. Under such a “low speed fluctuation state”, the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game is longer than that of the “high speed fluctuation state”, but instead, the production time can be made longer. It is useful in a gaming state where emphasis is placed on gameplay such as “enjoy”. In the gaming state where the probability of winning a big hit is low or the possibility is high, there are many players who want to enjoy the production while enjoying the production, contrary to the above-mentioned probability variation state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of “normal A” or “normal B”, the “low-speed fluctuation state” is generated.

(D-3: Quasi-constant velocity fluctuation state)
Further, in this embodiment, as in the case of “normal C”, regardless of the number of suspended balls, “special normal fluctuation 10 s (variation time 10 seconds)” is selected with a high probability at the time of loss, and each time A “quasi-constant speed variation state” is generated in which the digest time of the symbol variation display game is substantially constant. Under such a “quasi-constant speed variation state”, as described above, the execution time of the symbol variation display game for each time, that is, the performance time is almost constant, and the game proceeds multiple times (especially This is a special gaming state in which an effect having a close relationship (story-like effect of tailoring a story) can be generated across the symbol variation display game having a number greater than the maximum number of reserved memories. Even in the “probability change state”, the “normal change 2s during probability change” is selected with a high probability at the time of losing regardless of the number of suspended balls. I can say that. In the “normal C” and “probability change state” of the present embodiment, a “variation pattern with reach” having a variation time (direction time) longer than the “normal variation pattern” at the time of loss can be selected. A configuration in which no variation pattern is selected or a configuration in which the selection rate of the variation pattern with reach is extremely low may be employed. Also in this case, it becomes a “quasi-constant speed fluctuation state”, which is effective in generating the narrative effect.

(8-4. Special symbol variation processing: Fig. 20)
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S307) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (step S307) of FIG.

  In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory action timer is zero, that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory action timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the special symbol change time has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol is changing. Exit.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a “variation stop command” indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S451). S452). By this change stop command, the production control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol change display game has ended after the change time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops and displays (decision display) the decorative symbol that is currently displayed in the change display. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated along with the termination of the special symbol variation display game.

  Next, as a setting process at the time of stoppage of the special symbol fluctuation, the special symbol determination signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol determination timer of the RAM 203, and the fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ), The special symbol operation status is switched to “Checking (03H)” (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol variation flag, and the special symbol 1 variation counter is stored. And 00H is stored in the special symbol 2 fluctuation counter (fluctuation counter used in S642, which will be described later) and cleared (step S453), and this special symbol fluctuation processing is exited. The “special symbol determination signal output time” is an extra time for securing the output time of the special symbol determination signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been determined and displayed. It is. The “determined display time” is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the special symbol change display is finished and the special symbol is stopped.

  When the process of step S453 is completed, the special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 of FIG. 9 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special symbol display process of step S060 of FIG. Proceed to the electric accessory management process.

(8-5. Special symbol confirmation time processing (variation stop processing): FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B)
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described. 21A and 21B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

  21A and 21B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). The “determined display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S453 in FIG. 20). Until the special symbol accessory action timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the special symbol movement status is switched to “standby (01H)”, assuming that the current special symbol fluctuation display game is over (special symbol action). (01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game state determination number (YJ) corresponding to the current game state is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM 203 (step S473).

  Next, the big hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the big hit judgment flag is ON)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes when the big hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S475). Here, as various setting processes (pre-start process of the big hit game) at the time of the big hit symbol stop, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the big hit determination flag, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the condition device operation flag, General power release extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probable state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol probable state flag, special symbol short time counter, special symbol probable number counter, and special symbol variation count 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the counters, 00H (usually A designation) is stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), and the game state notification LED (see FIG. 50 (e)) is turned on / off. 00H is stored in the designated gaming state notification LED output number, and the process during this special symbol confirmation time is exited. The “gaming state notification LED” is state notification means for notifying current game state information. The gaming state notification LED (state notification unit) of the present embodiment is used to notify whether or not the special symbol time-short state is set. The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the game state notification LED (state notification means) according to the game state notification LED output number. For example, if the gaming state notification LED output number is “00H”, it means that the current state is not the special symbol short state (gaming state notification LED: off state (non-special symbol short state notification), and “01H”. Now, it is informed that it is in the special symbol short-time state (game state notification LED: lighting state (special symbol short-time state notification).

(When the big hit judgment flag is OFF)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). . When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to step S478. When the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S476: = 5 AH), various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit determination flag as various setting processes (small hit game start pre-processing) when the small hit symbol is stopped. When the various setting processes at the time of the small hit symbol stop are completed, the process proceeds to step S478.

  When the processing proceeds to step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining number of special symbol time reduction states) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol short time counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol short time counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digest of the current fluctuation number, and the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S480).

  If the special symbol short-time counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), since the special symbol short-time state end count has not reached 70, the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol short-time counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), setting processing at the time short-term end is performed on the assumption that the special symbol short-time state end count has reached 70 (step S481). Here, 00H (OFF state) is changed for each of the utility power release extended state flag, the normal symbol time-short state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, and the special symbol time-short state flag as setting processing at the time-short-time end. 00H is stored in the pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol time-short state designation) is stored in the gaming status notification LED output number. As a result, from the next game, the player is placed in a state without power support.

  When the setting process at the time of short time end in step S481 is finished, a “short time end command” including end information (non-electric support state transition information) as a special symbol time reduction state is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S481) S482). This “short-time end command” is a kind of “game state designation command” for designating the current game state or notifying that the game state is to be transferred. Know that there is no support. In the present embodiment, when the transition from the electric support state to the no electric support state is the same as the transition from the probability change state to the normal A, the presentation control unit 24 receives this “short time end command”. For example, when starting the next decorative symbol variation display game, the background image (background effect) for “normal A effect mode” is switched to perform effect control processing under the effect mode, or as the launch position For example, an effect control process for causing a “launching position guidance effect (left-handed notification effect)” to be directed to aim at the leftward flow path 3b is performed.

  Next, when the processing proceeds to step S483, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S484) as the current variation variation of the special symbol (step S484). Is determined to be zero (step S485).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST prescribed number (70 times) has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S487 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after the subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), setting processing at the end of probability variation is performed on the assumption that the variation number of the special symbol has reached the ST specified number of times (step S486). Here, as the transition setting process to the normal gaming state at the end of the latent probability state or the probability changing state, the normal utility release extended state flag, the normal symbol short state flag, the normal symbol probable state flag, the special symbol short state flag, In addition, 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the special symbol probability changing state flags, 00H is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol short-time state designation) is stored in the gaming state notification LED output number. To do. Thereby, from the next game, the jackpot lottery probability is placed from the high probability state to the low probability state. In the case of the latent state, the special symbol time counter is set to zero (see the game state transition preparation process in step S411 in FIG. 15 and FIG. 18 showing the details thereof). In the process, the end timing of the latent state is managed.

  When the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486 is completed, the process proceeds to the process in step S487, and whether or not the special symbol variation number counter is zero, that is, the game state transition specified number of times (when transitioning to “normal B”: gaming state) It is determined whether or not the prescribed number of times of transition 100 times and “normal C” transition time: 15 times or 30 times) is zero (step S487).

  If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S487: YES), the special symbol confirmation time is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S487: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S488) as the digest of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not (step S489).

  If the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S489: NO), it is determined that the game state transition prescribed number has not been reached, and the processing during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), the transition setting process to “normal A” is performed on the assumption that the special symbol variation count has reached the prescribed game state transition count (step S490). . Here, “00H (ordinary A designation)” is stored in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) as the transition setting process to “normal A”. As a result, the selection condition for the variation pattern of the special symbol is changed. This step S490 process functions as a selection condition switching means for switching and controlling the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined selection change condition. Thereby, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol in “normal A” is selected.

  Next, a “game state designation command” including “normal A” transition information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S491). With this “gaming state designation command”, the effect control unit 24 grasps that “normal B” or “normal C” ends and “normal A” starts from the next game. Thereby, when starting the decoration pattern variation display game to be performed next, the effect control unit 24 switches to the background image (background effect) for the “normal A effect mode” and performs the effect control process under the effect mode. Do.

  As described above, when the processing during the special symbol confirmation time is exited, the special symbol display data update processing in step S309 in FIG. 9 is performed, and then the special symbol management processing is exited, and the special electric equipment management in step 60 in FIG. Proceed to processing.

(9. Special electric equipment management process: FIG. 22)
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S060) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S060.

  In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hitting flag (step S501). When the small hitting flag is ON (= 5 AH) (step S501: = 5 AH), a small hit process is performed to control a series of operations of the special variable winning device 50 related to the small hit game (step S504). , Exit this special electric equipment management process.

  If the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH) and is not in the big hit game. Exit the special electric property management process.

  When the condition device operation flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S502: = 5AH), processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric accessory status branching process). . The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 50, and this status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branch process in step S503, the special symbol operation status is “starting process (00H)”, “operation starting process (01H)”, “continuation determination (03H)”, “ending process (04H)”. Depending on the status value, the corresponding process is called and executed. Specifically, when the operation status of the special electric accessory is “starting process (00H)”, the big hit start process (step S505) is performed. In the case where the accessory actuating start process (step S506) is in operation (02H), the special electric accessory actuating process (step S507) is in effect. In the case where the accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) is “ending process (04H)”, the jackpot end process (step S509) is called and executed. By these processes, the operation of the special variable winning device 50 related to the big hit game is controlled.

  Here, “being started (00H)” indicates that the player is in a standby state before the jackpot game starts, and “operation start process (01H)” is that the player is in a standby state before starting the round game. “In operation (02H)” indicates that a round game is being executed, and “Continuing determination (03H)” indicates that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. “Big jackpot end process in progress (04H)” indicates that the big hit game is ending.

  When one of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is completed, the special electric accessory management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 in FIG.

(9-1. Big hit start processing)
At the start of the big hit game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to “starting process (00H)” of the initial status value. Therefore, when a big hit is made, first, the big hit starting process is performed.

  In this jackpot start process (step S505 in FIG. 22), 5AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “operation start process (01H)” (special 01H is stored in the electric accessory operation status), and 01H is stored in the continuous number counter. The above-mentioned “actual accessory continuous actuating device operation flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the accessory continuous actuating device. This indicates that the round game can be continued, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is inactive (round game cannot be continued). The “continuous number counter” is a counter for storing the number of continuous executions of round games, that is, the current number of rounds. Since the continuous number counter here is “01H”, the current round number indicates the 1Rth.

  Next, a jackpot start setting table (see FIG. 46) is acquired, and the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) and round display LED number are determined according to the special symbol determination data (jacket type) with reference to the jackpot start setting table. Are stored in the corresponding storage areas of the RAM 203, and the start interval time is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. Thereby, the jackpot start process is finished, the special electric utility management process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
In the special electric accessory operation start processing (step S506 in FIG. 22), the “start interval time” of the first round (1R) and the “interval before opening” after the 2R are monitored by the special symbol accessory operation timer. Is done. Each time the interval time elapses and a winning opening opening operation is performed, a “big winning opening release command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 each time. This “big prize opening release command” includes round game start information (round production start instruction information) and current round number information, and when the production control unit 24 causes a round production corresponding to the number of rounds to appear. Used for

  Next, a special winning opening operating time setting table (not shown) is acquired, and a special winning opening operating time setting process is performed. In this special winning opening opening time setting process, the special winning opening operation time corresponding to the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds is referred to the special winning opening operation time setting table. To store. As a result, the special electric accessory activation start process is terminated, the special electric accessory management process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-3. Special electric equipment during operation)
In the process during operation of the special electric accessory (step S507 in FIG. 22), a large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process is performed. In the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process, the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 is mainly counted, and it is confirmed whether or not the number of winning balls has reached the maximum winning number.

  Next, the value of the special symbol accessory action timer is checked, and if the monitored special winning opening operation time has elapsed, the "round end command" It transmits to the production control unit 24. The “round end command” is used when the “round end effect” appears during the interval time between round games on the effect control unit 24 side.

  Next, as various setting processes when the round game is finished, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Continuing judgment (03H)” (03H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the special symbol accessory operation timer The remaining ball discharge time (for example, 1980 ms) is stored in. As a result, the process during the operation of the special electric accessory is finished, the special electric accessory management process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-4. Special electric equipment operation continuation determination process)
In the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508 in FIG. 22), the value of the continuous number counter is acquired to determine whether or not the current round number has reached the maximum number of rounds. When the maximum number of rounds has been reached, 1 is added to the continuous number counter (+1) as a process at the end of the round game continuation, and the end interval between round games including the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms in this embodiment) Set the time.

  In addition, as a setting process for starting the next round game after the end of the current round game, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory operation flag, (01H) ”(stores 02H in the special electric accessory operation status). Thus, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is completed, the special electric accessory management process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-5. Big hit end processing)
In the jackpot end processing (step S509 in FIG. 22), if the special symbol / combination action timer reaches zero (the end interval time elapses), the values of the transition state buffers are set as part of various settings at the end of the jackpot. Store in each status flag. Specifically, each value of the transition state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process in step S411 (see step S411 in FIG. 15, see FIG. 18 showing the details) during the special symbol variation start process is used as the game state. To specify the utility power open extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probable state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol probable state flag, special symbol short time counter, special symbol probable number counter, It is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number and the special symbol variation counter. Thereby, the gaming state after the big hit game is specified.

  Subsequently, various setting processes at the end of the jackpot are performed. Here, as various data used during the big hit game control process, the condition device operation flag, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, the continuous number counter, the maximum number of rounds, the normal electrical equipment release extended state buffer, the normal symbol time transition State buffer, normal symbol probability change state buffer, special symbol short state transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol short time counter buffer, special symbol probability variable number counter buffer, fluctuation pattern distribution designation number buffer, special figure variation The number counter buffer, the round display LED number, and the game state determination number (YJ) are each cleared (00H is stored), and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “starting processing (00H)” (special electric accessory operation) 00H is stored in the status).

  Next, a game state notification information update process for updating the game state notification information is performed. In this process, it is confirmed whether the special symbol short time state flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) or OFF state (≠ 5 AH), and if it is in the ON state, the gaming state notification LED (see FIG. 50 (e)) is turned on. 01H is stored in the data, specifically, the gaming state notification LED output number.

  When the jackpot ending process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed. After exiting the big hit end process, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

<Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 23 to 28>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 28, the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the side of the effect control unit 24 mainly includes a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 23) and a timer interrupt process (effect control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 24).

<10. Production control side main processing: FIG. 23>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing on the production control unit side (production control side main processing). The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG. 23 when the gaming machine main body is turned on from the outside.

  In the main process on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S071). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, moving object starting point return processing, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of CPU internal register values including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

  When the initial setting process in step S071 is completed, the main loop process in steps S073 to S078 is performed every predetermined time as a process during normal operation, and otherwise the effect soft random number update process in step S80 is repeated.

  In the process of step S072, the CPU 241 refers to the counter value for main loop update period and determines whether or not the main loop update period that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S072). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that is updated in a main loop update process (step S096 in FIG. 25) during an effect control side timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms. Until this main loop update period arrives (step S072: NO), various effect lottery random numbers are updated (step S079: various effect soft random number update processing).

  When the main loop update period has arrived (step S072: YES), the CPU 241 performs a received command analysis process (step S073). In this received command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read, and an effect control process corresponding to the read effect control command is read. I do. This effect control command includes the already described hold addition command, hold subtraction command, variation pattern designation command, decorative symbol designation command, variation stop command, and the like. For example, when a variation pattern designation command is received and stored in the reception buffer, in the command analysis process, variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command (variation time of special symbol, winning type, and variation start time One or a plurality of types of effect patterns are determined based on information such as fluctuation patterns) and the current number of activated balls. The effect pattern determined here works as a “part effect” as an element constituting the effect scenario. Subsequently, a time schedule is determined as to how long the determined production pattern (part production) is to be displayed at what timing and with what production time width, thereby creating a production scenario. Then, the production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Various production patterns (part production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing an “production scenario” in a broad sense. When the “button notice effect” is incorporated in the determined effect scenario, the “non-operation effect scenario” when the frame effect button 13 is not operated is constructed as a basic effect scenario. When the frame effect button 13 is operated while the button notice effect is being executed, the non-operation effect scenario needs to be replaced and changed to the “operation effect scenario” when the frame effect button 13 is operated. Such a process relating to the scenario change is performed in a “scenario update process” in step S74 described below.

  When the received command analysis process in step S073 is completed, a scenario update process is performed (step S074). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer necessary for execution of the production pattern are updated. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, the time within the variation period (decoration symbol variation period) in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed is within the same period as the variation period (special symbol variation period) in which the special symbol is variably displayed. On this axis, a time schedule for what kind of production pattern is made to appear in the production means with what time width is managed by this timer. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in an LED data update process (step S075) and an effect agent control data update process (step S077) which will be described later. Here, this production scenario timer is monitored, and when the production time of one production comes, the sound data for the speaker 46 and the liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243, respectively. . The LED data for the optical display device is created by an LED data update process (step S075) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by an after-mentioned effect actor control data update process (step 77). The

  In the scenario update process, the basic effect scenario determined in the received command analysis process (step S073) may be rewritten as necessary. As described above, when the “button notice effect” is incorporated in the basic effect scenario, it is necessary to change to an operation effect scenario different from the current non-operation notice effect scenario. Here, when it is confirmed that the frame effect button 13 is operated during the button notice effect, the operation effect scenario is changed (for example, the parts effect is rearranged), and the changed effect scenario data is set as the scenario setting. Reset to area.

  Next, LED data update processing is performed (step S075). In this LED data update process, LED data for a light display device such as a decorative lamp unit 45 or an LED is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. The data created here is used in an effect LED management process (step S095 in FIG. 25) during a timer interrupt process to be described later.

  Next, sound output processing is performed (step S076). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S074 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a sound effect is output from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit (sound source LSI). Thereby, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

  Next, a production accessory control data update process is performed (step S077). In the effect accessory control data update process, motor control data for the movable object accessory is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer. The data created here is used in a director action operation management process (step S094 in FIG. 25) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, noise countermeasure management processing for monitoring malfunction of the sound source LSI or the like is performed (step S078). If the program goes into a runaway state due to a malfunction, the watchdog timer expires and the CPU is automatically reset to recover from the runaway state. Thereby, the main loop process is terminated, and the effect soft random number update process in step S80 is performed until the next main loop update period comes.

(11. Command reception interrupt processing: FIG. 24)
Next, command reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing on the effect control side. This command reception interrupt process is executed with higher priority than an effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) described later when an effect control command is received from the main control unit 20.

  First, when an interruption based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs during execution of the main process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S081). The received effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243 (step S082), and the saved register contents are restored (step S083). Thereby, the command reception interrupt process is ended, the process returns to the effect control unit side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until an interrupt based on the next strobe signal is generated. As described above, when various effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 are received, this command reception interrupt process is executed, and when the effect control command is received, the command is stored in the command reception buffer. Is done.

(12. Production control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 25)
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the timer interrupt process on the production control side will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an effect control side timer interruption process. This production control side timer interruption process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 1 ms) from the CTC, and is executed by interruption during execution of the production control side main process.

  In FIG. 25, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S091), and then performs an effect button input management process (step S092). In this effect button input management process, whether or not an operation (ON operation) detection signal is input from the frame effect button 13 is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. To store. This information is used for the button notice effect.

  Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S093). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S074) in the effect control side main process of FIG. 23, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU). Thus, image display control for the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. Thereby, the image production along the production scenario is realized.

  Next, directing action operation management is performed (step S094). In this stage actor operation management, a control signal is output to the movable body accessory motor 61 through the drive control unit based on the motor control data for the movable body accessory created in the stage actor control data update process (step S077). To do. Thereby, the visual production | presentation by the movable body accessory along a production | presentation scenario is implement | achieved.

  Next, effect LED management is performed (step S095). In this effect LED management, based on the LED data created in the LED data update process (step S075), the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED are turned on and blinked through the light display control unit. Thereby, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, a main loop update process for managing the main loop update period is performed (step S096). In this main loop update process, the main loop update cycle counter is updated for each interrupt (main loop update cycle counter + 1). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that circulates in a range of multiples of 16 (for example, 0 to 31) by increment processing, for example.

  After completing the above steps S091 to S096, the saved register contents are restored (step S097). As a result, the timer interruption process is terminated, the process returns to the effect control side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<Contents of Received Command Analysis Processing: FIGS. 26 to 28>
FIG. 26 to FIG. 28 show processing closely related to the prefetching notice effect among the processing executed in the received command analysis processing (step S073 in FIG. 23). Hereinafter, a case where a “hold addition command”, a “variation pattern designation command”, and a “decorative symbol designation command” are received will be described.

(13. Processing for receiving pending addition command: FIG. 26)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a pending addition command is received. This hold addition command is an effect control command transmitted in step S326 of the special figure 1 start opening check process of FIG. 10 or step S346 of the special figure 2 start opening check process of FIG.

  In FIG. 26, when receiving the pending addition command, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first analyzes the content of the command and acquires prefetch determination result information (step S711). Here, the acquired information is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the RAM 203. In the pre-read information storage area, the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2) as in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 A pre-read information storage area corresponding to the side) is provided. In addition, these pre-read information storage areas are provided with a hold 1 pre-read information storage area to a hold n pre-read information storage area (in this embodiment, n = 4) corresponding to the number of active hold balls. Prefetch determination result information for the number of balls can be stored. For example, if the hold addition command received this time is a command “B707H”, the CPU 241 grasps the content of “special figure 1 hold 2 designation, strong SP reach A, and lose B” (prefetch fluctuation pattern X7). This is stored in the reserved 2 prefetch information storage area on the special symbol 1 side. As a result, it is possible to specify what kind of pre-reading determination result the existing operation holding ball has. In the case of “** 01H” (“**” on the MODE side is B5 to BE), “prefetching prohibited” is designated (see FIG. 38).

  Next, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the analysis information of the process in step S711 (step 712). If prefetching is prohibited (step S712: YES), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step S718 described later.

  If prefetching is not prohibited (step S712: NO), the process proceeds to step S713, and it is determined whether or not the “continuous notice counter” is zero (step S713). The “continuous notice counter” is a counter for setting a prohibition period for prohibiting the occurrence of the pre-read notice effect. Specifically, when the current operation-holding ball is selected as the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect by the pre-reading notice lottery in step S714 described below (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the current operation-holding ball is digested. This is a counter for preventing the newly generated operation holding ball from being subject to execution of the pre-reading effect until it is subjected to the variable display operation. In the “continuous notice counter”, the value of the current number of suspended balls is stored for the above-described reason (see step S717 described later).

  If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S713: NO), it is determined that the prefetch notice lottery is prohibited, and the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

  If the value of the continuous notice counter is zero (step S713: YES), prefetch notice lottery processing is performed assuming that the prefetch notice lottery is permitted (step S714). In this pre-reading notice lottery process, based on the pre-reading variation pattern information, whether or not “holding display changing system (change system at winning) pre-reading notice effect” (hereinafter referred to as “holding pre-reading notice effect”) can be executed, and “image It is determined by lottery whether or not the display change system (change system at the start of change) pre-reading notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “background pre-reading notice effect”) can be executed. The pre-reading notice lottery is performed on the condition that there is no variation pattern type with reach among the pre-reading variation patterns related to the existing operation holding ball. The presence / absence of the variation pattern with reach can be confirmed by confirming the information in the pre-read information storage area on the special symbol 1 side if the pending addition command this time relates to the operation holding ball on the special symbol 1 side. If it is related to the operation holding ball on the side, it can be performed by checking the information in the pre-read information storage area on the special symbol 2 side. Note that if the prefetch determination result information this time is “indefinite (normal fluctuation / reach)”, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation may be a fluctuation pattern with reach. It is preferable to consider.

  In this embodiment, only when generating the “hold pre-reading notice effect”, the “background pre-reading notice effect” is generated redundantly to clearly indicate which operation holding ball is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. At the same time, you will be able to win a big win. Accordingly, in the pre-reading notice lottery, (I) only the pre-reading pre-order notice effect can be executed, (II) both the pre-reading pre-order notice effect and the background pre-reading notice effect can be executed, or (III) any pre-reading notice is available. Three cases, such as whether or not to execute, are determined by lottery. Which case is determined depends on the “pre-reading notice lottery table (not shown)” associated with the winning type (in this embodiment, the big hit type, the small hit type, the loss type) and / or the contents of the pre-reading variation pattern. Is determined. In this look-ahead notice lottery table, the above (III) has the lowest chance of winning a big hit, and the case of (II) tends to have a higher chance of winning a big win than the case of (I) above. The selectivity of (I) to (III) above is defined. Specifically, in consideration of the winning type determined by the main control unit 20 and the selection rate of the look-ahead variation pattern, a reach type (for example, a weak SP reach A type or a weak SP reach) having a relatively low expectation of winning the big hit In the case of (B type), the selection rate of the above case (I) is relatively high, and in the case of a big win, or a reach type with a relatively high expectation degree of big win (for example, strong SP reach A type or strong SP reach) In the case of (B type), the selection rate in the case (II) is set to be relatively high. In the case of the normal variation pattern type, the selection rate of the case (III) is determined to be relatively high.

  In the prefetch notice lottery, in addition to the above (I) to (III), (IV) whether or not only the background prefetch notice effect can be executed may be included. When (V) a pre-reading effect (moving material pre-reading notice effect) by a movable object (not shown) is configured to be executable, the movable object is designated as “hold pre-reading notice effect” and / or “background”. A case where a lottery is performed with or without the pre-reading notice effect 'may be included. When (IV) and / or (V) are included, it is determined on the main control unit 20 side which of the cases (I) to (V) is likely to result in a high probability of winning big hits It can be freely determined in consideration of the selection rate of the selected winning type and the selection rate of the look-ahead variation pattern.

  Next, as a result of the pre-reading notice lottery in step S714, it is determined that the pre-reading effect can be executed. In the case of (I), the pre-reading operation status is “01H”, and in the case of (II), the pre-reading operation status is “02H”. "Is determined not to execute any pre-reading notice in (III) above," 00H "is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 as the pre-reading operation status (step S715).

  Next, the prefetch determination operation status is determined (step 716). If the pre-reading operation status is “00H” (step S716: = 00H), the pre-reading notice effect is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

  On the other hand, when the pre-reading operation status is other than “00H” (step S716: ≠ 00H), the number of suspended balls (the number of reserved memories) is stored in the continuous notice counter (step S717). For example, if the hold addition command received this time is a command “B706H”, since the command is “special figure 1 hold 2 designation”, the continuous notice counter indicates “02H” indicating 2 holds. Is stored. As a result, the pre-reading notice lottery for a new operation holding ball is prohibited for a certain period. Note that this counter value is decremented by one every time an old operation holding ball generated earlier is digested in the process of receiving a decoration designating command shown in FIG.

  When the process proceeds to step S718, a pending addition display process is performed (step S718). In the hold addition display process, the effect data related to the hold display of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is stored in the hold display data storage area (hold display scenario setting area) of the RAM 243 based on the result of the hold prefetch notice lottery. Store. In the reserved display data storage area, the reserved display data storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (special symbol 1 reserved display data storage corresponding to the special symbol 1 is stored) as in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. Area and special figure 2 hold display data storage area corresponding to special symbol 2). These hold display data storage areas are provided with a hold 1 display data storage area to a hold n display data storage area (n is the maximum hold display number: in this embodiment, n = 4), and each holds a maximum operation hold ball. It is possible to store presentation scenario data for several minutes of hold display. The CPU 241 can specify what kind of hold display is to be performed on the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 with reference to the hold display effect scenario data in the hold display data storage area. Yes.

  With respect to the above-described presentation scenario for hold display, if the “prefetching notice lottery” in step S714 is not won (lost) (prefetching notice operation status = 00H), the presentation data for normal holding display (for example, the hold icon) ("Blue" effect data) is stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won (pre-reading notice operation status ≠ 00H), the presentation data for the hold pre-read notice (dedicated hold display) (for example, the hold icon “blue, yellow, green, red, or rainbow”) Production data) is stored. Note that the number of colors to be reserved is determined based on the “reserved color selection table (not shown) associated with the winning type (in this embodiment, the big hit type, the small hit type, the loss type) and / or the contents of the prefetch variation pattern. ) ". In this reserved color selection table, the selection rate of the reserved color is determined so that the expectation of winning big hits tends to be high due to the relationship of “blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow”. For example, “Large hit” is more likely to be selected than “Lost”, and if the reach type has a relatively high expectation level for winning a big hit, a reserved color with a high expectation level for winning a big hit will be selected with a high probability. Yes.

  In this embodiment, when the “pre-reading notice lottery” is won, the color of the holding icon related to the action holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is, for example, one of yellow, green, red, or rainbow colors (usually It changes to blue), and the hold display appears continuously until the operation hold ball is digested (until it is used for the variable display operation) (FIG. 6 (1)). To (4)). Although details will be described later, when the “background prefetching notice effect” is also selected at the same time, a prefetching notice effect (lightning effect) by a dedicated notice image (lightning image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 together with the hold prefetching notice effect. Appearing, the pre-reading notice effect (lightning effect) by the lightning image appears continuously (see FIGS. 6 (1) to (4)).

  The pre-reading notice lottery process of step S714 is performed based on the pre-reading determination result (first pre-reading determination unit on the special figure 1 side or second pre-reading determination unit on the special figure 2 side) with the effect start condition (pre-reading determination). It functions as a notice execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute a prefetch notice effect that notifies information related to the prefetch determination result on the condition that an effect control command including information (hold addition command) has been received. Further, in the processing of step S718 or steps S755 to S760 described later, the pre-reading notice effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display means (liquid crystal display device 36) when the notice effect determination means determines that the notice effect can be executed. It works as a notice effect control means for controlling the appearance.

  In the present embodiment, the form in which the pre-reading notice effect of both the hold display change system and the image display change system is generated by the image display on the liquid crystal display device 36 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display system is configured so that the pre-reading notice effect of the image display change system can be displayed by the separate display means by the liquid crystal display device 36 by the holding display provided at the appropriate position of the pachinko machine 1. May be. In this case, the advance notice control means includes a hold prefetch notice control effect means for controlling the appearance of the hold display change type prefetch notice effect on a dedicated hold indicator (not shown), and a decorative symbol display means ( The liquid crystal display device 36) may include a function unit as image prefetching notice control means for controlling the appearance of the image display changing system prefetching notice effect. Further, the pre-reading notice effect may be expressed by an operation mode of a movable body accessory (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the notice effect control means may include a movable body control means for controlling the appearance of the pre-read notice effect for the movable object.

(14. Reception process of variation pattern designation command: FIG. 27)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a variation pattern designation command is received. This variation pattern designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S412 of the special symbol variation pattern creation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 27, when the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the variation pattern designation command, the content of the command is first analyzed (step S731), the variation pattern information of the special symbol as the content is obtained, and the RAM 243 is obtained. In the predetermined area (step S732). The effect scenario during the symbol variation display game is not yet determined at this point, and is determined when the decorative symbol designation command sent following the variation pattern designation command is received. That is, based on the variation pattern information stored here and the information (special symbol determination data information) included in the decorative symbol designation command, an effect scenario in the symbol variation display game is determined.

(15. Decoration symbol designation command reception processing: FIG. 28)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a decorative design designation command is received. This decoration symbol designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S415 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG.

  In FIG. 28, when the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the decoration symbol designation command, it first analyzes the content of the command and acquires the content (step S751).

  Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process is performed (step S752). In this stop decorative symbol lottery process, the left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol (decorative symbol) to be finally stopped based on the variation pattern information obtained in step S732 and the winning type information included in the decorative symbol designation command. Each stop symbol combination) is determined by lottery. For example, in the hit variation pattern with reach state, if the big hit type at that time is 15R long open probability variable big hit, first the left symbol is drawn and the left symbol and the decorative symbol that can form the reach state as the right symbol Based on the determined left symbol and right symbol, the middle symbol is determined so as to be finally stopped at the decorative symbol sequence related to the 15R long open probability variation jackpot. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol variation display game is completed is determined. Then, the determined decorative symbol data is stored in the decorative symbol data storage area of the RAM 243.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice counter is zero (step S753). If the continuous notice counter is zero (step S753: YES), the process proceeds to step S757 without doing anything.

  If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S753: NO), then the prefetch operation status is acquired and determined (step S755). When the prefetch operation status is other than “02H” (step S755: ≠ 02H), the process proceeds to step S757 without doing anything.

  If the pre-reading operation status is “02H” (step S755: = 02H), the background pre-reading notice effect is executed in this case, so that the process proceeds to step S756 and the background pre-reading notice setting process is performed (step S756). In this background prefetching notice setting process, first, one of the background prefetching notice effects is selected by lottery from a plurality of types of background prefetching notice effects based on the variation pattern information obtained in step S732. For example, one lightning effect is selected by lottery from among a plurality of types of lightning effects including lightning effects of lightning strikes, lightning effects of lightning strikes of lightning strikes, and lightning effects of lightning strikes. . Which lightning effect is to be generated is determined by a “lightning effect selection table (not shown)” associated with the variation pattern. In this lightning effect selection table, the selection rate of the lightning effect type is determined so that the expectation level for winning a big hit tends to be high due to the relationship “lightning lightning <medium lightning <strong lightning”.

  As already explained, since the “look-ahead variation pattern” determined at the time of winning a prize and the “basic pattern related to the variation pattern at the start of variation” determined at the start of variation, substantially the same pattern type is selected. The expectation of winning a big hit with the hold color of the hold icon and the expectation of winning a big hit with lightning are closely related. In more detail, the chances of winning big wins are indicated more clearly when the hold-ahead preview effect and the background-ahead preview effect appear more than when the hold-ahead preview effect appears alone. It has become. For example, if the reserved color is “red” and the lightning effect is “strong lightning”, the expectation of winning the jackpot will increase dramatically, but even if the reserved color is “red”, the lightning effect will be “weak lightning”. If this is the case, the expectation of winning a big hit will be lower than that. As described above, in the present embodiment, a clearer win-winning expectation degree is suggested when a plurality of pre-reading notice effects are mixed than when a single pre-reading notice effect appears.

  In the background prefetching notice setting process, the number of executions of the background prefetching notice effect is set to the same value as the value of the continuous counter (the value of the continuous counter is stored in the background notice execution counter), and the prefetching operation status is switched to “00H” ( 00H is stored in the pre-read operation status). As a result, when it is determined that the background pre-reading notice effect is to be executed when the one hold addition command is received, the background pre-reading notice setting process is performed at the start of the fluctuation of the oldest action-holding ball generated first. When another subsequent hold addition command is received, this background prefetching notice setting process is not performed unless the continuous notice counter is zero and the prefetching operation status is “02H”. In other words, in the present embodiment, unless the operation holding ball that is the target of the prefetching notice effect is digested, a new prefetching notice effect is not generated, and the generation of duplicate prefetching notice effects is prohibited.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step S756, 1 is subtracted from the continuous notice counter as the digestion of the currently activated ball (step S756).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the background notice execution counter is zero (step S757). If the background notice execution counter is not zero (step S757: NO), 1 is subtracted from the background notice execution counter as the digestion of the currently activated ball (step S758). Proceed to the production scenario setting process with lightning production. On the other hand, if the background notice execution counter is zero (step S757: YES), the background prefetch notice effect is not executed, and the process proceeds to the effect scenario setting process without lightning effect in step S761.

  In the effect scenario setting process with lightning effect in step S758, an effect scenario including a lightning effect that is a background look-ahead notice is determined as a notice effect that appears during the current decorative symbol variation display game. Thus, when one of the lightning effects is selected as the background prefetching notice effect, a lightning image appears in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 at the start of the change (see FIG. 6B). On the other hand, in the non-lightning effect production scenario setting process in step S761, the production scenario excluding the lightning effect that is the background pre-reading notice is determined. The production scenario determines multiple types of notice production as part production based on the information (variation pattern information, winning type, etc.) included in the fluctuation pattern designation command and decorative design designation command and the current production mode. An effect scenario is constructed, and this data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243.

  When the above-described effect scenario setting process is completed, various setting processes required for starting the decorative symbol variation display game are performed (step S760). Here, various settings required for starting the decorative symbol variation display game including the hold display shift process are performed. In the hold display shift process, the hold display data storage area (hold 2 display data storage area, hold 3) corresponding to the hold display data n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) as the decorative symbol variation effect is started. Display data storage area and hold 4 display data storage area) are overwritten on the hold display data storage area corresponding to 'n-1', respectively, and an empty area is provided in the hold 4 display data storage area. . Since the display scenario data for hold display is not stored in the hold display data storage area that is an empty area, in this case, the hold display effect is not performed, and the corresponding display location is displayed as an unlit state. As a result, the CPU 241 refers to the on-hold display effect scenario stored in the on-hold display data storage area and performs an effect display in which the position of the existing on-hold display unit is shifted to the old storage position as a whole. At the start of the decorative symbol variation display game, the hold display expressing the state where the operation hold ball is digested is performed. Note that the prefetch information storage area of the RAM 203 is also stored in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the hold n prefetch information storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) in the same manner as the above-described shift processing of the hold display data storage area. The prefetch determination result information is overwritten in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to 'n-1', an empty area is provided in the hold 4 prefetch information storage area, and the next hold addition command is received. An area for storing the result information is secured.

  When the process of step S760 is completed, the decorative symbol designation command receiving process is exited, and thereafter, the decorative symbol variation display game is started. In this way, the effect control unit 24 receives the first control command (holding addition command), and the symbol game (symbol variation) in which the predetermined variation start condition is not satisfied and the holding information is not yet digested. A display effect control means for controlling the appearance of a notice effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying information about what display result of the display result of the symbol game based on the hold information is, On the condition that the control command (variation pattern designation command) is received (in this embodiment, on the condition that the decorative symbol designation command following the fluctuation pattern designation command is received), the effect display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) 36. A symbol game execution control means for starting execution of the decorative symbol game (decorative symbol variation display game) in 36) is included.

<16. Various function display units: FIGS. 2 and 5>
(16-1. Structure by LED: FIG. 51)
Referring again to FIG. 2, various function display units constituted by a plurality of LEDs provided close to each other are provided in the non-game area of the game board, here, near the upper right edge of the game board 3. . As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 51 (a), three 7-segment displays (with dots) are juxtaposed in the various function display sections, and two 7-segment displays on the left side and the middle side thereof are used. A first special symbol display device 38a and a second special symbol display device 38b are configured. In addition, the remaining 7-segment display on the right side displays the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, display of the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, operating the variable time reduction function (short time), and high probability status. A hold / short-time / high-accuracy composite display device (hold composite display device) 38c capable of displaying five types of functions, ie, medium (high accuracy) status notification is configured. Further, a normal / round display block 39 having a normal symbol display LED group and a round number display LED group is disposed next to the holding composite display device 38c. That is, in this general map / round display block 39, a normal symbol display device 39a in which two dot-shaped LEDs are arranged in the horizontal direction and three dot-shaped LEDs are arranged in the horizontal direction. The round number display device 39b is arranged in two upper and lower stages. These constitute various function display sections.

  The special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the holding composite display device 38c, and the general drawing / round display block 39 are collectively arranged close to each other in the non-game area of the game board. Arrangement place in the non-game area is free. For example, the entire arrangement relationship of FIG. 51 (a) is changed to an arrangement relationship that is rotated 180 ° in the drawing, and this is arranged in the lower right non-game area or the central non-game area in the game board 3. You can also

  The non-game area of the game board is the upper right corner of the game board 3 in this embodiment, but a non-game area is formed at the center of the game board, and a game area is formed so as to surround it. When a non-game area is formed outside the game area, various function display portions are formed in either the non-game area formed inside the game area or the non-game area formed outside the game area. May be.

  The special symbol display devices 38a and 38b and the reserved composite display device 38c are composed of a 7-segment display, more precisely, a 7-segment LED display (with dots). Therefore, hereinafter, these three 7-segment LED displays are also referred to as special figure 1 display LED display 38a, special figure 2 display LED display 38b, and hold composite display LED display 38c. As the scanning target in the dynamic drive control, the LED group constituting the special figure 1 display LED display 38a and the LED group constituting the special figure 2 display LED display 38b are each one independent special symbol display system. The LED group constituting the hold composite display LED display 38c is put together as a block of the hold display system (more precisely, the hold composite display system), and the normal symbol display LED 39a and the number of rounds The display LED 39b is grouped as one general figure / round number display block.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the 7-segment LED display constituting the special figure 1 display LED display 38a, the special figure 2 display LED display 38b, and the hold composite display LED display 38c, It is composed of seven LED segments (A to F and G in the center in the clockwise direction) arranged in a figure 8 shape and one dot DP that is the eighth LED segment. Then, a data signal (dynamic lighting data Dn (D0 to D7 in FIG. 63) for individually activating them is added to each LED segment A to G and DP, and the common of each 7 segment LED display The corresponding 7-segment LED display is selectively driven by a scanning signal (dynamic lighting commons C0 to C3 in FIG. 52) applied to (anode common COM, DP-A in FIG. 52), and thus the corresponding 7 A current flows through the LED segment of the segment LED display to emit light. As described above, the three LED indicators 38a, 38b and 38c are driven by a dynamic drive system in which lighting of the LED indicators is sequentially switched by a scanning signal, and are dynamically displayed. In the case of this embodiment, the 7-segment LED display constituting the special symbol display devices 38a, 38b and the holding composite display device 38c uses an internal common anode circuit configuration. Instead, the internal circuit configuration is used. A 7-segment LED display with a cathode common can also be used.

(16-2. Wiring diagram: FIG. 52)
FIG. 52 is a wiring diagram showing the connection with the LED indicator ICs used in the special symbol display LED indicators 38a and 38b and the holding composite display LED indicator 38c. The anode side terminals COM and DP-A of the LED display ICs are common terminals, and the lines of the dynamic lighting commons C0 to C2 among the scanning signal output ports of the main control unit 20 via the lines L1, L2, and L3. Connected to things. Further, the common symbol display device 39a and the round number display device 39b of the general figure / round display block 39, that is, the anode common of the LEDs constituting them, is a dynamic signal among the scanning signal output ports of the main control unit 20. It is connected to the line of the lighting common C3.

  Accordingly, the special symbol display LED indicators 38a and 38b, the hold composite display LED indicator 38c, and the general-purpose / round display block are scanned by the scanning signals of the dynamic lighting commons C0 to C3 output from the output port of the main controller 20. 39 are sequentially selected and driven.

  On the other hand, the cathode side terminals A to G and DP-C in the individual LED display ICs used for the special symbol display LED displays 38a and 38b and the holding composite display LED display 38c are the LED segments A to G and This is a data signal input terminal corresponding to DP, and is connected to the lines of dynamic lighting data D0 to D7 in the data signal output port of the main control unit 20. Further, the cathodes of the LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 39a and the round number display device 39b of the normal / round display block 39 are connected to the dynamic lighting data D0 to D4 lines at the output port of the main control unit 20. .

  Therefore, the special symbol display LED indicators 38a and 38b and the hold composite display LED indicator 38c are obtained by adding dynamic lighting data Dn (D0 to D7) to the respective LED segments A to G and DP, and the corresponding 7 When the segment LED display common is selectively driven by the scanning signals of dynamic lighting commons C0 to C2, the LED segment corresponding to the input data emits light, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the number of operation suspension / short time Displays medium / high accuracy. Further, the LEDs of the normal symbol display device 39a and the round number display device 39b are added with dynamic lighting data D0 to D4 of the output port of the main control unit 20, and the common C3 of the normal / round display block 39 is a scanning signal. The LED corresponding to the input data emits light, and the normal symbol and the number of rounds are displayed.

(16-3. Display functions of LED indicators 38a and 38b for special symbol display: FIG. 53)
The special symbol display LED indicators 38a and 38b perform a special symbol variation display operation in the special symbol variation display game, and when the variation display operation is stopped, it is expressed by seven segments (more precisely, eight segments including the dot DP). Among the predetermined special symbols (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2), the special symbols reflecting the lottery results are, for example, the lose A symbol “•”, the lose B symbol “-”, and the winning symbols “1” “2”. Stop display in the display mode. The display mode of these stop symbols is specified by the special stop symbol number created in the special stop symbol data creation process (step S428 in FIG. 17).

  FIG. 53 shows a switching method for switching the special symbol display LED display data table in order to create a display mode in which the special symbol display is changing and a display mode in which the fluctuation is stopped (when stopped) (a display switching mode of the special symbol display). Is abbreviated. Here, an embodiment in which two types of A and B are prepared in the special symbol display LED display data table will be described.

  53, in order to simplify the description, the special symbol display LED display data table A displays “−”, “−”, “1”, “2”, “3”. Data is stored sequentially from address 0, and the special symbol display LED display data table B displays symbols of “•”, “−”, “1”, “2”, “3”. It is assumed that data is stored sequentially from address 0. Here, “·” is a Loss A symbol, “−” is a Loss B symbol, and “1”, “2”, “3”... Are hit symbols. For the loss A symbol “•” and the loss B symbol “-”, the stop display data is used as the display data during the change. Actually, as shown in FIG. 62, there are three types of stop symbols A, B, and C. Here, stop symbol data of stop symbols “·” and “−” corresponding to loses A and B are used. Are stored as variable display data at address 0 of the special symbol display LED display data tables A and B, respectively. The stop symbol data corresponding to the loss C is stored in each address of the special symbol display LED display data tables A and B, and it is shown that there is one type of loss.

  When the special symbol is “fluctuating”, that is, during the variable display period, the display data of symbols “−” and “•” at address 0 in the special symbol display LED display data tables A and B are alternately displayed at intervals of 128 ms. By switching with, the blinking display indicating the fluctuation is performed. When the special symbol is stopped in the case of “losing”, the display data of “−” and “−” symbols at the next address of the special symbol display LED display data tables A and B are alternately switched at 128 ms intervals. Thus, the symbol “−” is continuously lit and displayed. In the case of winning, for example, when the special symbol in the case of “one hit” illustrated in FIG. 53 is stopped, the symbols “1” and “1” are displayed at the second address of the special symbol display LED display data tables A and B. By switching the data alternately at intervals of 128 ms, the symbol “1” is continuously lit and displayed as a special symbol. Similarly, when the special symbol is stopped in the case of 2 hits, 3 hits,..., “2”, “2”, “3” in the 3rd, 4th, etc. LED display data tables A and B for special symbol display. By alternately switching the display data of the symbols “3” and “3”... At intervals of 128 ms, for example, symbols such as “2” “3”.

  The period during which the above special symbol is continuously lit, that is, the length of time from when the special symbol is stopped to when the next symbol variation display operation is started is the special symbol display in this embodiment. 500 ms, which is at least twice as long as the blinking period of 128 ms. Therefore, after the special symbol display mode maintains a stop state of 500 ms, which is longer than the blinking period of 128 ms, the next symbol variation display operation is started. For this reason, it is possible to easily recognize whether the display of the special symbol is being stopped or changing.

(16-4. Display Function of LED Display 38c for Hold Compound Display: FIG. 54)
FIGS. 54A to 54E individually show the five display functions identified by the segment type (arrangement position) and the light emission pattern type of the LED display 38c for holding composite display.

  FIG. 54 (a) shows a function of displaying the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls (special figure 1 reservation display). In the case of this example, the LED display 38c for holding composite display is “left” among the four LED segments A, B, F, and G arranged in the shape of a letter B on the upper side of the eight-segment arrangement of the seven segments. Special symbol 1 action hold ball by display mode by combination of lighting and blinking of two LED segments F, G (special figure 1 hold LED 1 and special figure 1 hold LED 2) arranged “L” in the “bottom” A number is displayed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the number of active balls is one (hold 1), only one left segment F (hold LED 1 for special figure 1) blinks. The display mode is set (first hold display mode: left segment F = flashing, lower segment G = off). Further, in the case of two operation-reserved balls (hold 2), the left and lower segments F and G (the hold LED 1 for special figure 1 and the hold LED 2 for special figure 1) are blinking together (first display) 2 hold display mode: left segment F = lower segment G = flashing). Further, in the case of 3 operation hold balls (hold 3), the left segment F (hold LED 1 for special figure 1) is lit, and the lower segment G (hold LED 2 for special figure 1) is blinking. Third hold display mode: left segment F = lit, lower segment G = flashing). And in the case of the number of operation hold balls 4 (hold 4), the left and lower segments F and G (the hold LED 1 for the special figure 1 and the hold LED 2 for the special figure 1) are both lit. Hold display mode: left segment F = lower segment G = lighted).

  FIG. 54 (b) shows a function for displaying the number of special symbol 2 operation suspension balls (special diagram 2 suspension display). In the case of this example, the LED display 38c for holding composite display is “up” among the four LED segments A, B, F, and G arranged in a square shape on the upper side of the eight-character arrangement 7 segments. The number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is displayed by the combination of lighting and blinking of the two LED segments A and B arranged on the “right” (the reserved LED 1 for special figure 2 and the reserved LED 2 for special figure 2). Is done.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), in the case of one operation holding ball (holding 1), only one upper segment A (holding LED 1 for special figure 2) blinks. A mode (first hold display mode: upper segment A = flashing, right segment B = off). Further, in the case of two active holding balls (holding 2), the upper and right segments A and B (the holding LED 1 for special figure 2 and the holding LED 2 for special figure 2) are blinking together (first display) 2 hold display mode: upper segment A = right segment B = flashing). Further, in the case of 3 operation hold balls (hold 3), the upper segment A (hold LED 1 for special figure 2) is lit and the right segment B (hold LED 2 for special figure 2) is blinking. (Third hold display mode: upper segment A = lit, right segment B = flashing). And in the case of 4 operation hold balls (hold 4), the upper and right segments A and B (the hold LED 1 for special figure 2 and the hold LED 2 for special figure 2) are both lit. 4 hold display mode: upper segment A = right segment B = lighted).

  FIG. 54 (c) shows a function of displaying the number of reserved balls for normal symbols (ordinary map display). In the case of this example, the LED display 38c for holding composite display is arranged in “left” and “right” among the three segments CDE arranged in the U shape on the lower side of the eight character arrangement 7 segments. The number of reserved balls for normal symbols is displayed according to the display mode based on the combination of lighting and blinking of the two segments C and E (ordinary hold LED 1 and universal hold LED 2).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), in the case where the number of active holding balls is 1 (hold 1), only one right segment C (usual hold LED 1) blinks. (First hold display mode: right segment C = flashing, left segment E = off). Further, in the case of two operation hold balls (hold 2), the right and left segments C and E (the normal hold LED 1 and the general hold LED 2) are both flashing on the hold display mode (second display). Hold display mode: right segment C = left segment E = flashing). Further, in the case of three operation hold balls (hold 3), the right segment C (ordinary hold LED 1) is lit and the left segment E (usual hold LED 2) is blinking. 3 hold display mode: right segment C = lights on, left segment E = blinks). And in the case of 4 operation hold balls (hold 4), the hold display mode (the 4th hold LED 1 and the usual hold LED 2) is turned on together (the fourth hold LED 1 and the usual hold LED 2). Hold display mode: right segment C = left segment E = lighted).

  FIG. 54 (d) shows a display function for notifying that the fluctuation time shortening function is in operation (change fluctuation being shortened (during time reduction)). In the case of this example, the LED display 38c for holding composite display includes one segment D arranged “below” among the three segments CDE arranged in the U shape below the seven segments of the eight character arrangement. Whether or not the variable time shortening function (variable shortening (short time) function) is activated is displayed depending on whether or not (time-shortage notification LED 1) is lit.

  FIG. 54 (e) shows a display function for informing a high probability state (high probability). In the case of this example, the hold composite display LED indicator 38c displays whether or not the gaming state is in a high probability state, depending on whether or not the dot DP (highly accurate notification LED) that is the eighth segment is lit. . This dot DP (high-accuracy notification LED) is lit until the condition device is activated in the case of power failure recovery under a high probability state, and notifies that the probability variation function is in operation when power is restored.

  Based on the above operation, when the configuration of various function display units is viewed centering on the LED, the special figure 1 display LED display 38a and the special figure 2 display LED display 38b have the first special design and the second special design. Each LED is constituted by a plurality of LEDs blinking during the fluctuation display. The LED segments F and G and the LED segments A and B of the LED display 38c for holding composite display function as first special symbol holding number display means and second special symbol holding number display means, respectively. Therefore, the first special symbol hold number display means and the second special symbol hold number display means include a plurality of LEDs (LED segment F, LED segments F, G, A, and B).

(16-5. General Map / Round Display Block 39 Display Function: FIG. 55)
FIG. 55 shows the display function of the general map / round display block 39. In this ordinary figure / round display block 39, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), a normal symbol display device 39a in which two dot-like LEDs are arranged horizontally, and a dot-like LED above it. A round number display device 39b formed by arranging three LEDs horizontally is provided.

  The normal symbol display device 39a executes a normal symbol variation display game by a normal symbol variation display operation expressed by two LEDs constituting the ordinary symbol display device (alternating blinking on the left and right alternately, and stopping and displaying after a predetermined time). . When the normal symbol variation display (repetitive blinking alternately on the left and right) is stopped, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the left LED is lit, “losing” is indicated. When the right LED is lit, it is configured to represent a hit.

  When the left LED (LED 5 in FIG. 52) of the three LEDs is lit, the round number display device 39b is a hit type of “2R (round)”, that is, a 2R short open latency big hit value, etc. When the middle and right LEDs (LEDs 4 and 3 in FIG. 52) are lit, this indicates that the type of jackpot is “10R (round)”, that is, 10R long open probability variable jackpot, etc. When the three LEDs on the left, middle, and right (LEDs 5, 4, and 3 in Fig. 52) are lit, this indicates that the type of jackpot is "15R (round)", that is, 15R long open probability variable jackpot At that time, the right LED (LED 3 in FIG. 52) is turned on to indicate “right-handed”. However, in the case of a ball game machine with specifications that have only 2R jackpots and 15R jackpots, the display mode of the round number display device 39b at the time of 15R jackpots is the two LEDs on the inside and outside of the above three LEDs. The LED may be turned on, and among the two LEDs, a 15R big hit may be indicated by turning on the middle LED, and “right-handed” may be indicated by turning on the right LED.

(16-6. Special figure hold display LED display function: FIG. 56)
56. To create the first hold display mode (1 hold) to the 4th hold display mode (4 hold) and the 5th display mode without hold for the special symbol 1 operation hold ball number. FIG. 2 shows a switching method for switching two types of special figure 1 hold display LED display data tables A and B (display switching mode of special figure 1 hold display). FIG.

  In the special display 1 hold display LED display data table A, for the left and lower segments F and G (reservation LED 1 for special figure 1 and hold LED 2 for special figure 1), LED1 = LED2 = off, LED1 = on and LED2 = LED OFF = LED1 = LED2 = ON, LED1 = LED2 = ON, LED1 = LED2 = ON display data are sequentially stored from offset value 0 to offset value 4. Also, in the special figure 1 hold display LED display data table B, the left and lower segments F and G (the special figure 1 hold LED 1 and the special figure 1 hold LED 2) LED1 = LED2 = off, LED1 = LED2 = LED OFF = LED1 = LED2 = OFF, LED1 = ON and LED2 = OFF, LED1 = LED2 = ON display data are sequentially stored from offset value 0 to offset value 4.

  In the case of “no hold” for the number of the special symbol 1 hold balls, the LED display data (LED1 = LED2 = off) of the offset value 0 in the LED display data table A for special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 1 hold display LED display data at the offset value 0 in the LED display data table B (LED1 = LED2 = extinguish) is used by alternately switching at intervals of 256 ms, so that either table A or B is on the switching side. In addition, the left and lower segments F and G are continuously turned off.

  In the case of “one hold”, the LED display data of the offset value 1 address in the special display 1 LED display data tables A and B for special figure 1 (LED1 = lights on the table A side and LED2 = lights off, on the table B side) LED1 = LED2 = off) are alternately used at intervals of 256 ms. As a result, the left segment F (LED1) is turned on on the table A side and turned off on the table B side, thereby continuously “flashing display”, and the lower segment G (LED2) is set on the table A side. By turning off the light and turning off the light on the table B side, a continuous “light-off display” is obtained (see the status of the hold 1 in FIG. 54A).

  Further, in the case of “2 hold”, the LED display data of the offset value 2 address in the special display 1 LED display data table A and B for special display 1 (LED1 = LED2 = light on the table A side, LED1 = on the table B side) LED2 = lights off) are alternately used at intervals of 256 ms. As a result, both the left segment F (LED1) and the lower segment G (LED2) are turned on simultaneously on the table A side and turned off simultaneously on the table B side, resulting in continuous “flashing display” (FIG. 54 ( (See the status of hold 2 in b)).

  In the case of “3 hold”, the LED display data of the offset value 3 address in the special display 1 LED display data table A and B for special display 1 (LED1 = LED2 = light on the table A side, LED1 = on the table B side) Are switched on and off at intervals of 256 ms. As a result, the left segment F (LED1) is lit continuously on both the table A side and the table B side, thereby providing a continuous “lighting display”. The lower segment G (LED2) is on the table A side. By turning on and turning off at the table B side, a continuous “flashing display” is obtained (see the status of the hold 3 in FIG. 54 (a)).

  In the case of “4 hold”, the LED display data at the offset value 4 in the special display 1 LED display data table A and B for hold display (LED1 = LED2 = light on the table A side, LED1 = on the table B side) LED2 = lights on) are alternately used at intervals of 256 ms. As a result, both the left segment F (LED1) and the lower segment G (LED2) are lit simultaneously on both the table A side and the table B side, resulting in a continuous “lighting display” (FIG. 54 (a)). Refer to the status of the hold 4).

  Although not shown in FIG. 56, two types of special figure 2 hold display LED display data tables used to create the first hold display mode to the fourth hold display mode for the special symbol 2 operation hold ball number as well. A and B are prepared, and the same display data switching control as in the case of “0 hold” to “4 hold” is performed for segment A (special figure 2 hold LED 1) and segment B (special figure 2 hold LED 2). Is done.

(16-7. Difference in blinking cycle)
In the above-described special figure 1 display LED display 38a, special figure 2 display LED display 38b, and hold composite display LED display 38c, the dynamic lighting commons C0 to C3 and dynamic lighting data are supplied from the main control unit 20. Signals D0 to D4 are added to drive dynamic lighting.

  At that time, the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display LED display 38a and the special figure 2 display LED display 38b is different from the blinking period of the hold composite display LED display 38c. Of these LEDs, focusing on the special symbol display and the reserved number display, the blinking cycle of the special symbol display system (the special indicator 1 display LED display 38a and the special indicator 2 display LED display 38b) is 128 ms. On the other hand, the blinking cycle of the reserved number display system (LED display 38c for reserved composite display) is 256 ms. That is, the LED of the special symbol holding number display means (the segments F, G of the holding composite display LED display 38c or the segment F, G or the LED of the special symbol display LED indicators 38a, 38b than the first blinking cycle of the LED (segment G, DP)). The second blinking cycle of A, B) is longer. For this reason, it is easy to distinguish and recognize the display of the special symbol display system and the display of the reserved number display system. This effect is particularly noticeable when a 7-segment display or LED is arranged in a narrow local area of the non-game area, or an explanation plate or the like is not arranged around it.

  That is, a plurality of LED groups (in this embodiment, the display units 38a, 38b, 38a, 38b, which are collectively provided close to a predetermined number of non-game areas of the game board and controlled by a main control unit that controls the progress of the game) 38c LED segment group and general-purpose / round display block 39 LED group), which has various function display portions (FIG. 51 (a)). If it can be recognized that a fast LED segment group exists, it is the blinking of the LED segment of the LED indicator 38a for special figure 1 display or the LED indicator 38b for special figure 2 display, and the display mode of the LED segment (FIG. 53). See), the special symbol display mode including whether or not the special symbols 1 and 2 are changing and which symbols are stopped when the change is stopped. Transition situation of Te is found. On the other hand, if it can be recognized in comparison with this that there is an LED segment group (F, G, or A, B) with a slow blinking period, it is a reserved number display system (LED display 38c for a reserved composite display). The LED segment blinks, and the LED display mode (see FIGS. 54 (A), (B), and FIG. 56) distinguishes between the special 1 hold display and the different 2 hold display, and holds for the special symbols 1 and 2. It can be seen that the number transition state, that is, the state in which the hold number display changes between hold 0 and hold 4.

(Advantages of using 16-8.7 segment LED display)
In ball game machines, etc., the Z80 system of an 8-bit microcomputer is used as the processor, so the LED display has a number of segments that can distinguish the display mode such as special symbols and the number of reserved items by data that fits in 1 byte (8 bits). 8) LED indicators are desired. If an attempt is made to increase the number of segments for one LED display from eight to one, the data to be handled needs to be increased by 1 byte to 16 bits due to the increase in one segment. It is. Of course, it is conceivable to make and use an LED display with 16 segments, but the function can be covered by using two general-purpose 7-segment LED displays. There is little need to make and use. This is one reason why a 7-segment LED display in which a total of 8 LED segments including dots are mounted on a substrate is employed. Another reason why the 7-segment LED display is adopted is that, out of a total of 8 segments, 7 of them have an elongated shape that can be distinguished from each other by the difference in orientation such as horizontal or vertical, and the remaining Each segment is in the form of a dot that can be distinguished from the others. Therefore, it is possible to visually identify which segment is activated (lit or blinking) from the arrangement relationship (orientation and arrangement position) of each segment. Therefore, a display form of a specific shape (for example, the numbers 1, 2, 3,...) Can be made to appear depending on the number of segments in operation and the arrangement relation.

  On the other hand, even if the 7-segment LED display is used, if a limited total of 8 segments can be used to display more than 8 types of LED display modes, the 7-segment LED display to be used The number of vessels can be reduced. For example, if three sets of four different LED display modes (total 12 types of LED display modes) are made to appear, twelve LED segments are simply required. If an aspect is made to appear on one 7-segment LED display (number of segments: 8), the number of LED segments is insufficient with respect to the number of types of display aspects.

  However, in the case of this embodiment, the number of the operation reservation balls of the special symbol 1, the number of the operation reservation balls of the special symbol 2, and the number of the operation reservation balls of the normal symbol are all displayed in only two segments in the LED display. Thus, it is possible to express four types of hold display modes of hold 1 to hold 4 respectively. For example, in the case of special 1 hold display, hold 1 to hold 4 are displayed by a combination of two light emission patterns of segments F and G. For this reason, even with one 7-segment LED display 38c, the above five display functions (4 types of special 1 hold display, 4 types of special 2 hold display, 4 types of general map hold display, fluctuation reduction) (Short time) One type of notification, and one type of high probability (highly accurate) notification, a total of 14 types) can be displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, only the four segments A, B, F, and G on the upper half of the eight segments of the 7-segment LED display with dots are used, and the special symbol 1 and Since it is possible to express the hold display mode (total 8 types) of the number of all active hold balls for the special symbol 2, for the other two lower segments C, E and D and the dot DP It has become a surplus segment available elsewhere. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to express the hold display mode (four types in total) of the number of balls with an active hold for a normal symbol by using the two segments C and E on the lower side, and the fluctuation of the segment D is reduced. (Short time) Used to display a notification, and the dot DP is used to display a high probability (during probability change) notification.

  Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since the blinking period is different between the display mode of the number of reserved balls and the display mode of the special symbol, it is easy to identify them. That is, the blinking cycle of the special symbol display system LED indicators 38a and 38b is 128 ms, and the blinking cycle of the LED display unit 38c of the reserved number display system is 256 ms. Since the blinking periods are different from each other in this way, it is possible to easily distinguish and recognize the special symbol display system display and the reserved number display system display.

  For example, since the blinking cycle is fast, it can be seen that the LED indicators 38a and 38b of the special symbol display system are blinking. From the display mode of the LED indicator, the special symbols 1 and 2 are changing during and after stopping You can see the transition situation. Further, in comparison with this, it can be seen that the LED display 38c of the holding number display system is flashing because the flashing cycle is slow. From the display mode of the LED segments A, B, F, G, the special symbol 1, It can be seen that the number of hold 2 changes between hold 0 and hold 4. Further, from the display modes of the LED segments C and E, it can be seen that the number of normal symbols held changes between the hold 0 and the hold 4.

  In this way, the blink cycle is made different so that the blinking of the LED display 38a, 38b of the special symbol display system and the blinking of the LED display 38c of the reserved number display system can be distinguished and made visually distinguishable. An explanatory text (for example, “Special Figure 1”, “Special Figure 2”, “Hits”, etc.) for distinguishing from the LED display 38c of the reserved number display system is written around the display LED indicators 38a and 38b. Or by denoting the role of the segment around the LED display 38c of the reserved number display system, to indirectly distinguish it from the LED displays 38a, 38b of the special symbol display system (for example, "Special Figure" 1) ”,“ Special Figure 2 ”,“ Temporary Map ”, etc.) or a display plate is not required. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the display area around the LED indicators 38a and 38b of the special symbol display system and the LED display 38c of the reserved number display system.

  Of course, even when a 7-segment LED display is used, an explanatory character plate explaining the meaning of the display mode of the winning or holding number can be arranged around, so that the role of the 7-segment LED display itself and the LED segment can be arranged. The role of can be easily understood. This method includes a segment indicating a special symbol display system function (for example, hit) and a function for holding display system (for example, special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display) in one composite display LED display 38c. This is effective in clarifying the function of each segment in the case of a configuration in which segments indicating the above are mixed. However, disposing such descriptive characters around the LED display occupies an area that cannot be ignored. Therefore, devise in size and shape so that it can be placed on corner decorations (decorative frames that are non-game areas in the game board) in the local areas at the four corners that are non-game areas in the game board. Depending on the circumstances, it is difficult to place it on the corner decoration of a game board. As in this embodiment, the flashing cycle of the LED display 38a, 38b of the special symbol display system and the flashing cycle of the LED display 38c of the reserved number display system are different when the LEDs are arranged close to each other. However, since the presence of a character plate or the like for explaining the display function of the LEDs can be eliminated, it is meaningful in that a structure that is not subject to restrictions on mutual arrangement of LEDs can be indirectly constructed.

  In addition, eight LED segments are not arranged in an 8-character shape, but a total of independent LEDs (segments) are concentratedly arranged in a planar shape, linearly or in an arc shape, etc. It is also possible to treat each unit as one display.

<17. Control of each function display>
Next, how to control each function display unit (FIG. 51 (A)) will be described.

(17-1. Work area and special symbol LED output data table: FIGS. 61 and 62)
FIG. 61 shows the work area of the RAM related to the display of special symbols and normal symbols. Here, with respect to special symbol 1, work areas of “W_T1MVFLG special symbol 1 variation flag”, “W_T1ZCNT special symbol 1 variation counter”, “W_T1STPNO special symbol 1 stop symbol number”, “W_T1ZGRNO special symbol 1 display symbol number” Is secured. For special symbol 2, work areas of “W_T2MVFLG special symbol 2 changing flag”, “W_T2ZCNT special symbol 2 fluctuation counter”, “W_T2STPNO special symbol 1 stop symbol number”, “W_T2ZGRNO special symbol 1 display symbol number” are secured. Is done. For normal symbols, the work areas of “W_FMVFLG Special Symbol 1 Fluctuating Flag”, “W_FZCNT Special Symbol 1 Fluctuation Counter”, “W_FSTPNO Special Symbol 1 Stop Symbol Number”, and “W_FZGRNO Special Symbol 1 Display Symbol Number” are secured. The

  In the W_T1MVFLG area, a special symbol 1 changing flag is stored in step S413 of FIG. 15, and in the W_T1STPNO area, a special symbol 1 stop symbol number is stored in step S410 of FIG. In the W_T2MVFLG area, the special symbol 2 changing flag is stored in step S413 of FIG. 15, and the special symbol 2 stop symbol number is stored in the W_T2STPNO area in step S410 of FIG.

  FIG. 62 shows a special symbol LED output data table. This special symbol LED output data table is prepared for two for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, both of which have the same configuration except for the distinction for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 Therefore, only the special symbol 1 is shown here, and the description is replaced with the special symbol 2 description.

  In the special symbol LED output data table of FIG. 62, the Loss A symbol “•” is stored at the stop symbol 0, and the Loss B symbol “-” is stored at the stop symbol 1. The stop symbol data of the Loss A symbol “•” at address 0 and the Loss B symbol “-” at address 1 are also used as changing data for indicating that the special symbol is changing. If this is expressed from the side of the changing data, the stop symbol 0 is displayed at “0” for one display symbol “•” for alternately displaying the display symbols “•” and “−” during the variable display. “Fluctuating data 0” is stored, and “Stopping data 1” is data for the other display symbol “−” when the display symbol “•” and “-” are alternately displayed at the stop symbol No. 1. 1 "is stored.

  In the special symbol LED output data table of FIG. 62, stop display symbol “-.” Data at the time of loss stop in Loss C is stored at stop symbol No. 2. Stop symbol data for stop symbols 3 to 5 are each 2R short-release latent hit, stop symbol data for stop symbol 6 and after are each 10R long open-probability hit (stop corresponding to the special stop symbol number in FIG. 31) Symbol data) are stored sequentially. Therefore, in the special symbol LED output data table of FIG. 62, the three types of special stop symbol number lost stop symbol output data shown in FIG. 33A and the 12 types of special stop symbols shown in FIG. The jackpot stop symbol output data of the number is stored. These stop symbol output data are designated by relative address values (offset values 0, 1, 2,...) Having the stop symbol 0 address as the head address.

(17-2. Special symbol display data update processing: FIG. 57)
FIG. 57 shows details of the special symbol display data update process (step S309 in FIG. 9). In the special symbol display data update processing of FIG. 57, first, display data is updated with respect to special symbol 1, so that the special symbol 1 changing flag stored in the W_T1MVFLG area of RAM 203 in step S413 of FIG. 15 and the step of FIG. The special symbol 1 stop symbol number stored in the W_T1STPNO area of the RAM 203 in S362 is loaded into a separate register (steps S631, S632), and the special symbol 1 changing flag and the special symbol 1 stop symbol number are held in the register Then, the process proceeds to the next step S633, and the symbol display data creation process for the special symbol 1 is executed (step S633).

  Next, in order to update the display data for the special symbol 2, the special symbol 2 changing flag stored in the W_T2MVFLG area of the RAM 203 in step S413 of FIG. 15 and the special symbol stored in the W_T2STPNO area of the RAM 203 in step S362 of FIG. After the 2 stop symbol numbers are loaded into separate registers (steps S634 and 635), the special symbol 2 changing flag and the special symbol 2 stop symbol number are held in the register, and the process proceeds to the next step S636. The symbol display data creation process for 2 is executed (step S636).

(17-3. Symbol display data creation processing: FIG. 58)
FIG. 58 shows the details of the symbol display data creation process (subroutine) that is called and used in steps S633 and S636 in the special symbol display data update process (FIG. 57). This symbol display data creation processing is used as a common processing module in the symbol display data creation processing of the special symbol 1 (step S633) and the symbol display data creation processing of the special symbol 2 (step S636). This symbol display data creation processing is also used as a common processing module for ordinary symbols.

  First, the symbol display data of the special symbol 1 is created using the symbol display data creation processing of FIG. In this case, first, it is checked whether or not the content of the special symbol 1 changing flag set in the register is 5AH (special symbol 1 is changing) (step S641).

  When the special symbol 1 changing flag is 5AH (when special symbol 1 is changing), the value of the special symbol 1 variation counter in the RAM work area W_T1ZCNT is loaded into the HL register, and the HL register (special symbol) The value of 1 fluctuation counter) is incremented by 1 (1 is added) (step S642).

  Here, the “variation counter” is LED display data (flashing and lighting) for the purpose of alternately switching and displaying two types of symbols “•” and “-” for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, respectively. This is a counter for creating a switching timing used for switching control. If the special symbol is fluctuating (during the fluctuating display period), this fluctuation counter is incremented by 1 every 4 ms which is the interrupt period of the main control timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) during that period. Is increased (step S642 in FIG. 58), and is cleared when the period (variation time) of the special symbol variation display ends (step S453 in FIG. 20). For this reason, the count operation of the variation counter, and hence the update operation of Bit5 output of the variation counter described later, is performed only during the special symbol variation display period. There are two types of variation counters, a special symbol 1 variation counter and a special symbol 2 variation counter, depending on whether the variation counter is used in step S633 or S636 of FIG. When used in step S633 of FIG. 57, it functions as a special symbol 1 variation counter, and when used in step S636, it functions as a special symbol 2 variation counter. This variation counter is a counter different from an LED output counter (see steps S651, S6653, and S671) described later.

  Next, the value of Bit 5 (6th bit) of the special symbol 1 fluctuation counter (HL register pair) is checked (step S643). Since the special symbol 1 variation counter counts once every 4 ms, the binary output of Bit 5 switches between “1” and “0” with a period of 128 ms that counts 32.

  If Bit 5 of this special symbol 1 variation counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S 644, and “changed data 0” for display symbol “·” is displayed as the symbol number (here, special symbol 1 display symbol number W_T1ZGRNO). The area is set (step S644). Specifically, stop symbol 0 in FIG. 62 is designated as a relative address value, and changing data 0 for dot “•” display is set in work area W_T1ZGRNO (specific symbol 1 display symbol number) in FIG. (Step S644). When the changing data 0 is set in the area of W_T1ZGRNO, the dot “·” is displayed as the stop symbol of the specific symbol 1 on the special indicator 1 display LED display 38a.

  If the binary output of Bit 5 of the special symbol 1 variation counter is switched from “0” to “1” after 128 ms has elapsed since the dot “•” is displayed, the process proceeds to step S645 and the display symbol is displayed. “Fluctuating data 1” for “−” is set in the area of the display symbol number (here, special symbol 1 display symbol number W_T1ZGRNO) (step S645). Specifically, the stop symbol number 1 in FIG. 62 is designated as the relative address value, and the changing data 1 for displaying the bar “−” is displayed in the area of the work area W_T1ZGRNO (specific symbol 1 display symbol number) in FIG. Set (step S645). By setting the changing data 1 in the area of W_T1ZGRNO, a bar “-” is displayed as the stop symbol of the specific symbol 1 on the special indicator 1 display LED display 38a.

  When 128 ms elapses after the bar “-” is displayed, Bit 5 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation counter is changed from “1” to “0”, and the changing data 0 is set in the area of W_T1ZGRNO. The dot “·” is displayed as the stop symbol of the specific symbol 1 on the one-display LED display 38a.

  When the binary output of Bit5 of the above-described variation counter is switched between “1” and “0” with a period of 128 ms, during the symbol variation, the first special symbol display device (the LED indicator for special diagram 1 display) 38a Is switched to “•” and “−” with a period of 128 ms.

  Here, in FIG. 53, it has been described that there are two types of A and B in the special symbol display LED display data table, but actually, the symbol display of the lose A symbol “•” and the lose B symbol “-” Therefore, the same special symbol LED output data table is also used. This form is shown schematically in FIG. Here, the stop symbol data of the loss A symbol “•” and the loss B symbol “−” in the case of FIG. 62 are collectively displayed as changing data, and the lost stop symbol data that is not shared as changing data is displayed. , Only one of the lost C symbol “-” data is shown.

  In this way, since the same special symbol LED output data table A is used for both sides of the switching for the symbol display of the dot “•” and the bar “−”, the special symbol LED output data to be switched every 128 ms. There is no need to prepare two types of tables (see FIG. 62) for the dot “•” and the bar “−” separately, and only one type is required. This also applies to the process of creating symbol display data for the special symbol 2. That is, when creating the symbol display data for the special symbol 2, only one kind of special symbol LED output data table for the special symbol 2 having the same configuration as that of FIG. 62 is prepared. The symbol LED output data table is commonly used as a switching destination data table for dot “·” symbol display and as a switching destination data table for bar “-” symbol display.

  That is, during the period during which the special symbol 1 is being displayed, the relative address indicating the stop symbol 0 and the relative address indicating the stop symbol 1 in the special symbol LED output data table are alternately designated, Stop symbol data (special stop symbol numbers 00H and 01H in FIG. 33) are alternately set in the W_T1ZGRNO area and used.

  When the period during which the special symbol 1 is being displayed (for example, 3 seconds for the normal variation 3 seconds or 10 seconds for the special normal variation 10 s) has elapsed, the special symbol 1 display symbol number is displayed in advance in the special indicator 1 display LED 38a. The special symbol 1 specified in is stopped and displayed. In other words, if it is determined in step S641 that the changing flag is not 5AH (special symbol 1 is stopped), the relative address where the corresponding symbol symbol data on the special symbol LED output data table of FIG. 62 exists is present. A value is designated, and the corresponding special symbol 1 stop symbol data is set in the work area W_T1ZGRNO (display symbol number) (step S646).

  For example, when the stop symbol of the special symbol is “losing B” of the first address in the special symbol LED output data table of FIG. 62, the relative address indicating the first stop symbol is designated, and the stop symbol data of that address is specified. (Special stop symbol number 01H in FIG. 33) is set in the W_T1ZGRNO region. Here, the stop symbol data in the case of the loss B at the offset value 1 is data for displaying the loss B symbol “-”, and this is the other one that switches between “•” and “−” during the variable display. It is also used as the display data for the stop symbol “-”. If the stop symbol of the special symbol is “losing C” of the second address in the special symbol LED output data table of FIG. 62, a relative address indicating the second address is designated, and the stop symbol data (figure of the address) 33 special stop symbol number 02H) is set in the W_T1ZGRNO area. In addition, in the case of “2R short open latent hit” in address 3 in the special symbol LED output data table of FIG. 62, the relative address of address 3 is designated, for example, stop symbol data of stop symbol “2” ( The special stop symbol number 06H in FIG. 31 is set in the W_T1ZGRNO area. The same applies to other stop symbols such as “2R short-release latent contact”, “2R short-release latent contact”, “10R long open-probability contact”, etc. after stop symbol 4 is stopped.

  After the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the next symbol variation display operation is started after maintaining the stopped state of 500 ms, which is longer than the special symbol display blinking period of 128 ms.

  Similarly, the special symbol 2 is processed in steps S624 to S626 in FIG. 57, and the symbol display data creation processing in FIG. 58 is called. In this symbol display data creation process, first, it is checked whether or not the special symbol 2 is changing based on the special symbol 2 changing flag acquired in step S624 of FIG. During the period in which the special symbol 2 is variably displayed, the special symbol 2 variation counter is incremented by 1 every 4 ms. When the output of Bit 5 is “0”, the special symbol 2 display symbol number (special symbol 2 display symbol number W_T2ZGRNO )) “Changed data 0” for “•” is set, and in the case of “1”, “change” for “−” is displayed in the area of the special symbol 2 display symbol number (special symbol 2 display symbol number W_T2ZGRNO). Medium data 1 "is set. As a result, during the fluctuation of the specific symbol 1, “•” and “−” are alternately lit and displayed in the 128 ms cycle on the special indicator 1 display LED display 38a.

    When the period during which the special symbol 2 is being displayed has elapsed, the process proceeds from step S641 to step S646, and the relative address value where the corresponding stop symbol data on the special symbol LED output data table of FIG. The special symbol 1 stop symbol data is set in the work area W_T1ZGRNO (display symbol number) (step S646). As a result, the special symbol 2 specified in advance by the special symbol 2 display symbol number is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 2 display LED display 38b. Then, after maintaining the stop state of 500 ms that is longer than the blinking period of 128 ms for the special symbol display, the next symbol variation display operation is started.

(17-4. LED management processing, FIG. 59)
FIG. 59 shows the details of the LED management process (step S62 in FIG. 8). In this LED management process, the special display 1 LED display 38a, the special display 2 LED display 38b shown in FIG. The created display data is output to the LED of the display device 39b. As a result, a normal symbol, a special symbol variation display operation and a stop symbol display, a blinking / lighting display corresponding to the number of holdings, and the like are performed.

  59, first, a clear signal is output to the LED common port and the LED data port to clear the port (step S651), and the LED output counter is updated (+1) (step S652). This LED output counter is incremented by 1 every 4 ms which is the interrupt period of the main control timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the count value increases, and data for specifying the LED blinking period from a predetermined bit. Is a counter for outputting.

  Here, the “LED output counter” has two functions. As the first function, an output of a cycle (16 ms) for dynamically driving the LED common is obtained by using the output of the lower 2 bits of the LED output counter. Also, as a second function, the output of Bit 6 (7th bit) of the LED output counter is used to flash the hold / short time / high-precision composite display of the hold composite display LED display 38c for a predetermined period (256 ms). Get the output. In other words, for each of the display of the special symbol 1 operation hold ball number and the special symbol 2 operation hold ball number, the general diagram hold display, the variable time shortening function in operation (short time) and the high probability state (high accuracy) state notification The display mode of these LED segments is either “OFF” to “OFF”, “OFF” to “ON”, “ON” to “ON”, or “ON” to “OFF” The output of the switching period (256 ms) for switching is obtained. Of these, LED segment G and F, A and B, and D of special symbol 1 operation hold ball number, special symbol 2 operation hold ball number display and general map hold display are switched between the above 256 ms. The LED data table A for holding display that determines whether the display mode on one side of the switching to be the cycle is set to “flashing” or “lighting”, and the display mode on the other side of the switching is “flashing” and “ Two types of LED data table B for holding display that determines which of “lighting” is to be placed are prepared (see FIG. 63). The output of Bit 6 of the LED output counter serves to create a switching timing for alternately switching the tables A and B at a cycle of 256 ms. FIG. 65 (b) schematically shows a switching method (display switching mode of special figure 1 hold display) when switching the display mode of LED segments G and F that make special figure 1 hold display among them.

  Therefore, the output state of the lower 2 bits (bit 0 and bit 1) of the LED output counter is checked (step S653), and the output of the lower 2 bits of the LED output counter is “00 → 01 → 10 → 11 → 00 →. The LED dynamic lighting commons C0 to C3 are sequentially selected and driven as they are sequentially switched (steps S654, S657, S659, S661).

  FIG. 64 shows common C0 to C3 scanning signals (dynamic lighting commons C0 to C3 in FIG. 52) for dynamically selecting the LED blocks of the 7-segment LED indicators 38a, 38b, and 38c and the general-purpose round number display block 39. LED data D0 to D7 for individually selecting individual LEDs in each LED block (dynamic lighting data D0 to D7 in FIG. 52) and driven LEDs (segments A to G, DP and LED1) selectively driven by these -LED5) and its relationship with the display function.

  As for the individual driven LEDs of the segments A to G, DP and LEDs 1 to LED5, the LED blocks to which they belong are sequentially selected by the dynamic lighting commons C0 to C3, and the signals of the dynamic lighting data D0 to D7 are applied to themselves. Thus, dynamic lighting is driven.

  When the LED common C0 (LED display 38a for special figure 1 display) is selectively driven by the scanning signal (step S654), it corresponds to the special symbol 1 display symbol number created by the symbol display data creation process (FIG. 58). LED data is created (step S655), and the LED data is output to the LED data port (step S656). When the LED common C1 (LED display 38b for special figure 2 display) is selectively driven by the scanning signal (step S657), LED data corresponding to the special symbol 2 display symbol number is created (step S658), and the LED data LED data is output to the port (step S656).

  When the LED common C2 (LED display 38c for holding composite display) is selectively driven by the scanning signal (step S659), the holding number data creation process (step S660) is performed, and the special symbol 1, special symbol 2, normal LED data corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the symbol and state notification LED data are created, and the LED data is output to the LED data port (step S656). Details of the reserved number data creation processing will be described later.

  Further, when the LED common C3 (general map / round display block 39) is selectively driven by the scanning signal (step S661), the LED data corresponding to the display symbol number of the normal symbol, the round display LED data, and the right-handed display LED data is created (step S662), and the LED data is output to the LED data port (step S656).

(17-4-1. Holding number data creation processing: FIG. 60)
In the reserved number data creation processing, first, the output state of Bit 6 of the LED output counter used for creating the LED common dynamic drive output (cycle: 16 ms) (step S653) is checked (step S671). Then, depending on whether the output state of Bit 6 of the LED output counter is 0 or 1, referring to one of the LED data tables A and B shown in FIG. 63, special symbol 1, special symbol 2, normal LED data corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the symbol and state notification LED data are created (steps S672 to S674).

  That is, in the determination of step S671, when the output state of Bit 6 of the LED output counter is 0, the LED corresponding to the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol is referred to LED data table A. Data is created (step S672). Next, status notification LED data (short and medium LED data for notifying the shortage and high-accuracy LED data for notifying high accuracy) are created (step S673), and then the process returns to step S660 of FIG. On the other hand, when the output state of Bit 6 of the LED output counter is 1 in the determination of step S671 in FIG. 60, the LED data table B is referred to according to the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol. LED data and status notification LED data are created (step S674). Next, status notification LED data is created (step S673), and then the process returns to step S660 of FIG.

  Accordingly, the LED data table A for hold display and the LED data table B for hold display are switched at a period of 256 ms by the output of Bit 6 (7th bit) of the LED output counter, and the hold display is performed on one side of the switching. LED data corresponding to the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol is created using the LED data table A (step S672), and status notification LED data is created (step S672). S673). On the other side of the switching, LED data corresponding to the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol is created using LED data table B for holding display (step S674), Notification LED data is created (step S673). Then, the process returns to step S660 of FIG. 59 and is output to each LED data port (step S656).

(17-4-2. LED data table for hold display, FIG. 63)
FIG. 63 shows LED data tables A and B for holding display that can be switched alternately with a period of 256 ms by the output of Bit 6 (7th bit) of the LED output counter. The uppermost column of both tables shows the 8-bit output (LED data Dn) of the LED output counter. Of the LED data Dn (Bits 0 to 7), Bits 0 to 1 are segments of the LED display 38c for holding composite display. F, G (holding LEDs 1 and 2 for special figure 1), Bits 2 to 3 are for segment A, B (holding LEDs 1 and 2 for special figure 2), Bits 4 to 5 are segments C and E (holding LED 1 for general use, 2), Bit 6 is display output data for the segment D (short time medium notification LED 1), and Bit 7 is display output data for the dot DP (high accuracy medium notification LED).

  The LED data Dn (Bits 0 to 7) in the LED data tables A and B for holding display are “holding 0” to “holding 4” for displaying the number of holding balls for the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2 and the normal symbol, respectively. The LED data Dn for “hold 0” to “hold 4” is determined by “0” or “1” for each bit of Bits 0 to 7. Here, “0” means off and “1” means on.

  The two hold display LED data tables A and B are alternately switched at a cycle of 256 ms.

(A) In the case of the data for reserved LEDs 1 and 2 in FIG. 1 For example, in the case of the data for reserved LEDs 1 and 2 (segments F and G) of Bit 1 to 0 in FIG. In “Hold 0” in FIG. 1, the output of Bits 1 to 0 is “00” regardless of whether the table A or B is switched. As a result, the left special LED 1 hold LED 1 corresponding to Bit 0 also has Also, the lower special figure 1 holding LED 2 corresponding to Bit 1 is also turned off. FIG. 56 shows this “no hold” switching mode.

  In “hold 1” in FIG. 1, the output of Bits 1 to 0 is “01” when switched to the table A side, and the output of Bits 1 to 0 is “00” when switched to the table B side. This is alternately switched at a period of 256 ms. Since the data of Bit 0 is switched between “1” and “0”, the left special figure 1 hold LED 1 corresponding to Bit 0 is in a “blinking” state in which blinking is repeated at a cycle of 256 ms. Since the data of Bit1 only switches between “0” and “0”, the lower special figure 1 hold LED 2 corresponding to this Bit1 is in the “light-off” state (the hold 1 in FIG. 54 (b)). Display mode)). FIG. 56 shows this “hold 1” switching mode.

  In the hold 2 in FIG. 1, the output of Bits 1 to 0 is “11” when switched to the table A side, and the output of Bits 1 to 0 is “00” when switched to the table B side. Since this is alternately switched in a cycle of 256 ms, as a result, both the left special figure 1 hold LED 1 corresponding to Bit 0 and the lower special figure 1 hold LED 2 corresponding to Bit 1 are in a “flashing” state (FIG. 54). (Refer to the display mode of hold 2 in (a)). FIG. 56 shows this “pending 2” switching mode.

  In the hold 3 of FIG. 1, the output of Bits 1 to 0 is “11” when switched to the table A side, and the output of Bits 1 to 0 is “01” when switched to the table B side. This is alternately switched at a period of 256 ms. Since the bit 0 data is simply changed from “1” to “1” and does not change, the left special figure 1 holding LED 1 corresponding to this bit 0 is in the “lighted” state. In addition, since the data of Bit1 switches between “1” and “0”, the lower special figure 1 hold LED 2 corresponding to Bit1 is in the “flashing” state (see hold 3 in FIG. 54 (a)). . FIG. 56 shows this “hold 3” switching mode.

  In the hold 4 in FIG. 1, the output of Bits 1 to 0 is “11” when switched to the table A side, and the output of Bits 1 to 0 is “11” when switched to the table B side. Since this is alternately switched at a cycle of 256 ms, as a result, the left special figure 1 holding LED 1 corresponding to Bit 0 and the lower special figure 1 holding LED 2 corresponding to Bit 1 are both in the “lighted” state (FIG. 54). (See Hold 2 in (a)). FIG. 56 shows this “hold 4” switching mode.

(B) In the case of the data for the hold LEDs 1 and 2 of the special figure 2 In the case of the data for the hold LEDs 1 and 2 (segments A and B) of the special figure 2 of Bits 3 to 2 with respect to the LED display 38 c for the hold composite display In the case of 1, the hold display is performed by switching between the tables A and B as shown in FIG. That is, in “hold 0”, both the upper special figure 2 hold LED 1 corresponding to Bit 2 and the right special figure 2 hold LED 2 corresponding to Bit 3 are both in the “off” state (“no hold” in FIG. 56). Switching mode).

  In “pending 1” in FIG. 2, since the output “01” of Bits 3 and 2 on the table A side is switched to the output “00” of Bits 3 and 2 on the table B side, the upper special figure corresponding to Bit2 is switched. The hold LED 1 for 2 is in a “flashing” state that repeats blinking at a cycle of 256 ms, and the hold LED 2 for the special figure 2 on the right side corresponding to Bit 3 is in the “off” state (the display mode of the hold 1 in FIG. (See the switching mode of “1 hold” in FIG. 56).

  In the special figure 2 hold 2, the output “11” of Bits 3 and 2 on the table A side and the output “00” of Bits 3 and 2 on the table B side are switched, so the hold for the special figure 2 on the upper side corresponding to Bit 2 The right special LED 2 hold LED 2 corresponding to the LED 1 and Bit 3 is in a “flashing” state (see the display mode of the hold 2 in FIG. 54B and the switching mode of “hold 2” in FIG. 56).

  In the special figure 2 hold 3, the output “11” of Bits 3 and 2 on the table A side is switched to the output “01” of Bits 3 and 2 on the table B side, so the hold for the special figure 2 on the upper side corresponding to Bit 2 LED 1 is in the “lit” state, and the right special LED 2 hold LED 2 corresponding to Bit 3 is in the “flashing” state (the display mode of hold 3 in FIG. 54 (b), the switching of “hold 3” in FIG. 56. See embodiment).

  Since the outputs of Bits 3 and 2 on the table A side and the table B side are both “11” in the hold 4 in FIG. 2, the upper special figure 2 hold LED 1 corresponding to Bit 2 and the right special figure corresponding to Bit 3 are shown. The two hold LEDs 2 are both in the “lighted” state (see the display mode of the hold 2 in FIG. 54A and the switching mode of “four hold” in FIG. 56).

(C) In the case of data for normal hold LEDs 1 and 2 In the case of the data for hold LEDs 1 and 2 (segments C and E) of Bit 5 to 4 (normal symbol) for the LED display 38c for the hold composite display, In the “hold 0” in the figure, the output of Bits 5 to 4 is “00” regardless of whether the table A or B is switched. As a result, the right hold LED 1 on the right side corresponding to Bit 4 also has Bit5. Both the left-hand general-use hold LEDs 2 corresponding to the “OFF” state are also turned off.

  In the usual “hold 1”, the output of Bits 5 to 4 becomes “01” when switched to the table A side, and the output of Bits 5 to 4 becomes “00” when switched to the table B side. This is alternately switched at a period of 256 ms. Since the data of Bit 4 is switched between “1” and “0”, the right-side holding LED 1 on the right side corresponding to Bit 4 is in a “blinking” state in which blinking is repeated at a cycle of 256 ms. Further, since the data of Bit5 only switches between “0” and “0”, the left-hand holding hold LED 2 corresponding to this Bit5 is in the “light-off” state (see hold 1 in FIG. 54 (c)). ).

  In the usual hold 2, the output of Bits 5 to 4 is “11” when switched to the table A side, and the output of Bits 5 to 4 is “00” when switched to the table B side. Since this is alternately switched at a cycle of 256 ms, as a result, the right-side general-use hold LED 1 corresponding to Bit 4 and the left-side general-use hold LED 2 corresponding to Bit 5 are both “flashing” (FIG. 54C). (See Hold 2).

  In usual hold 3, the output of Bits 5-4 is "11" when switched to the table A side, and the output of Bits 5-4 is "01" when switched to the table B side. This is alternately switched at a period of 256 ms. Since the data of Bit4 is simply switched from “1” to “1”, the right hold LED 1 on the right side corresponding to Bit4 is in the “lit” state. Since the data of Bit 5 switches between “1” and “0”, the left-hand holding hold LED 2 corresponding to Bit 5 is in a “flashing” state (see hold 3 in FIG. 54C).

  In the usual hold 4, the output of Bits 5 to 4 is “11” when switched to the table A side, and the output of Bits 5 to 4 is “11” even when switched to the table B side. Since this is alternately switched in a cycle of 256 ms, as a result, both the right general-use hold LED 1 corresponding to Bit 4 and the left general-use hold LED 2 corresponding to Bit 5 are in the “lighted” state (FIG. 54C). (See Hold 2).

(17-5. Operation of special symbol fluctuation counter and LED output counter: FIG. 66)
66, special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 special symbol variation counter (hereinafter simply referred to as “symbol variation operation counter 1”), special symbol 1, special symbol 2 or normal symbol hold display Differences in the operation of the LED output counter (hereinafter simply referred to as “holding display operation counter 2”) will be described.

(A) Symbol fluctuation operation counter 1
66A shows the update operation of the Bit5 counter output of the symbol variation operation counter 1, the relationship between the special symbol variation display (abbreviated as “variable” in FIG. 66) and the stop period, and the symbol LED. The display operation of turning on and off (LED segments of the symbol display LED indicators 38a and 38b) is shown.

  In the special symbol variation display operation, when the variation display period (time t1 to t2) occurs and the period elapses, the next 500 ms period (time t2 to t3) during symbol suspension occurs, and then The pattern is a repeating pattern in which a period (time t3 to t4) during fluctuation display occurs. Here, the symbol variation operation counter 1 counts every 4 ms only during a variation display period (time t1 to t2, time t3 to t4), and counts during a 500 ms period (time t2 to t3) when the symbol is stopped. Stop operation. That is, the symbol variation operation counter 1 (special symbol 1 variation counter and special symbol 2 variation counter) performs symbol display data update processing (symbol display data creation processing in steps S633 and S636 in FIG. 57 showing details of step S309 in FIG. 9). In step S641), if the symbol changing flag is 5AH, the counting operation is continued during that period (special symbol changing) (step S642), and the value is not 5AH (the special symbol is stopped). Is stopped and the content of the symbol variation operation counter 1 is cleared (step 453 in FIG. 20).

  For this reason, during the period during which the special symbol fluctuation display is being performed, the symbol fluctuation operation counter 1 updates the counter output of Bit 5 (6th bit) with a period of 128 ms, but the period during which fluctuation fluctuation is not being displayed ( In the period when the symbol is stopped), the relationship is not updated. During the period during which the special symbol is being displayed, the LED segment G of the symbol “-” of the special symbol and the LED segment DP of the symbol “•” blink, and the symbol “-” and the symbol “•” The lighting display is switched alternately, and during the period when the symbol is stopped, the corresponding special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is stopped according to the LED data corresponding to the display symbol number of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. Is displayed (steps S655, S658, and S656 in FIG. 59).

  The long / short relationship between the shortest variation time (time during variation display) of the special symbol and the blinking cycle (128 ms) in the above is the update of the symbol variation operation counter 1 than the shortest variation time (for example, 2 seconds) of the special symbol. There is a relationship that the period (128 ms) is much smaller.

  In detail, when the fluctuation display operation of the special symbol is performing a high-speed fluctuation in which the big hit is immediately determined without the reach effect by the decorative pattern, for example, the “normal fluctuation during probability variation” of the normal fluctuation pattern, for example. In the case of “2 s (variation time 2 seconds)”, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is the shortest 2 seconds. Even in the case of this high-speed fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation time 2 seconds), the symbol fluctuation operation counter 1 is sufficiently shorter than 2 seconds, which is the shortest time of the fluctuation display, during the period during which the special symbol fluctuation is displayed. It is updated at a period of one millisecond order (for example, 128 ms, etc.) that is a constant repetition period of 1 and that allows the player to visually recognize the turning on and off of the blinking state with the naked eye. However, the symbol variation operation counter is not updated during the special symbol stop display period.

  As described above, the symbol change operation counter 1 is updated at a constant interval only during the period during which the special symbol is being displayed, thereby performing the operation of alternately switching between the symbol “-” and the symbol “•” only during the display of the change. Therefore, it is possible to clearly distinguish and grasp whether the special symbol is in a variable display period or a stop display period. The light emission pattern when the variable display period and the stop display period are repeated for this special symbol is the light emission of the hold number display LED by constantly updating the hold display operation counter 2 described below. Since it is different from the pattern (two LED segments may blink simultaneously), it becomes easier to distinguish whether the LED belongs to the reserved number display system or the special symbol display system.

  Further, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the next symbol variation display operation is started after maintaining the stopped state of 500 ms which is longer than the blinking period of 128 ms of the special symbol display. For this reason, it is possible to easily recognize whether the display of the special symbol is changing or not.

(B) Operation counter 2 for holding display
FIG. 66 (b) shows the count operation, that is, the update operation of the hold display operation counter 2, and the hold number display operation by the hold LED 1 and the hold LED 2 when the hold number changes from 0 to 4.

  The hold display operation counter 2 is sufficiently shorter than the shortest time of the special symbol fluctuation display (fluctuation time of 2 seconds at high speed fluctuation), for example, a second constant that is the same as or different from the first constant repetition period. And is constantly updated at a millisecond order period (for example, 128 ms or 256 ms) that enables the player to visually recognize the turning on and off of the blinking state with the naked eye.

  Specifically, the hold display operation counter 2 is blinking in two LEDs: a hold LED 1 (Special Figure 1 Hold LED 1, Special Figure 2 Hold LED 1) and a Hold LED 2 (Special Figure 1 Hold LED 2, Special Figure 2 Hold LED 2). In order to synchronize the cycle, the output of Bit 6 (the seventh bit) is constantly updated with a cycle of 256 ms. By the output of Bit 6 (7th bit) of the hold display operation counter 2, the LED data tables A and B (FIG. 63) described above are switched with a period of 256 ms. The hold LED 1 and the hold LED 2 change the display mode according to the light emission pattern based on the LED data tables A and B. In the “hold 1”, the hold LED 1 is blinking and the hold LED 2 is turned off. The hold LED 1 and the hold LED 2 are both blinked, the hold LED 1 is turned off and the hold LED 2 is blinked in “hold 3”, and both the hold LED 1 and the hold LED 2 are turned on in “hold 4”. In the “hold 2”, both the hold LED 1 and the hold LED 2 are blinking, and the blink of the hold LED 1 and the blink of the hold LED 2 are synchronized with each other during the blink state.

  If the hold display operation counter 2 is constantly updated in this manner, the flashing of the hold LED 1 and the hold LED 2 is synchronized, and the hold number display function is easily understood.

  The LED group of the hold composite display LED display 38c has a hold number display mode in which a plurality of LEDs are blinking at the same time. This is the case of “hold 2” for special 1 hold display, “hold 2” for special 2 hold display, and “hold 2” for normal hold display. In the case of these “hold 2”, if the flash cycle is different between the hold LED 1 and the hold LED 2, it becomes difficult to recognize that “the LED of the same hold number display system is flashing”. It is difficult to understand the meaning of “flashing LED of special symbol display system” or “flashing LED of other display system”. However, in this embodiment, in the period of the hold number display mode in which the hold LED 1 and the hold LED 2 blink at the same time, the LED blinks synchronously. It can be understood that it is blinking.

  The effect of facilitating understanding of the meaning of the blinking display is to arrange a 7-segment display or LED in a narrow local area of the non-game area, or an explanatory plate around it. This is particularly noticeable when the form is not used. The effect of facilitating understanding of the meaning of the blinking display is that the blinking cycle of the LED display 38a, 38b of the special symbol display system and the LED display 38c of the reserved number display system. Can be obtained regardless of whether or not. Therefore, with regard to obtaining this advantage, the blinking cycle may be the same for the LED display 38a, 38b of the special symbol display system and the LED display 38c of the reserved number display system. In the above description, the first constant repetition period and the second constant repetition period may be the same or different for this reason.

<Modification 1>
In the case of the above embodiment, the hold display operation counter 1 regulates the 256 ms cycle (determined by whether Bit 6 is 0 or 1), and the symbol variation operation counter 2 is determined by the 128 ms cycle (Bit 5 is 0 or 1). However, this relationship may be determined in reverse so that the hold display operation counter 1 regulates the 128 ms cycle and the symbol variation operation counter 2 regulates the 256 ms cycle. .

  Furthermore, the display mode of blinking the special symbol may be such that the blinking cycle in the blinking display of the special symbol 1 and the blinking cycle in the blinking display of the special symbol 2 are different from each other. Similarly, the display mode in which the special symbol hold display blinks may be different from the blink cycle in the special symbol 1 hold display blink display and the blink cycle in the special symbol 2 hold display blink display.

  In the above embodiment, the output of Bit 6 of the LED output counter is used to obtain an output of a predetermined cycle for flashing the hold / short time / high accuracy composite display of the LED display 38c for hold composite display. The output of Bit 5 of the LED output counter may be used to obtain an output of a predetermined cycle for blinking the on-hold / short-time / high-accuracy composite display of the on-hold composite display LED display 38c.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described embodiment, the configuration for displaying information related to the number of reserved special symbols in a plurality of types of display modes using two LED segments has been described. However, it can also be configured to display with a smaller number of LEDs than the maximum reserved storage number (holding upper limit number). For example, the display modes from the hold 1 to the hold 4 can be made to appear by using three LEDs that are smaller than the maximum hold storage number (4). In the case of this configuration, for example, from the hold 1 to the hold 3, a display mode in which three LEDs are turned on in a one-to-one correspondence is used. When the hold 4 is set, all LEDs (three) are blinking. By adopting the mode, the display modes from the hold 1 to the hold 4 can be displayed.

<Modification 3>
In the above embodiment, a 7-segment LED display in which 7 LED segments are arranged in an 8-character form is used to display a special figure 1 display LED display 38a, a special figure 2 display LED display 38b, and a holding composite display. The case where the LED display 38c is configured has been described. However, without arranging the LED segments in an 8-character shape, for example, an independent LED (segment) such as a petal shape or a dot shape is planar so as to have an arbitrary appearance shape such as a dot shape, a linear shape, or an arc shape. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which they are centrally arranged.

  In addition, a configuration in which these eight LED segments are set as one unit (one group), and a plurality of units (multiple groups) of LEDs are arranged in a concentrated manner, that is, each one unit (each group) is provided as one display. It can also be set as the structure handled as.

  Further, in a configuration in which a large number of LEDs are intensively arranged close to each other in the non-game area of the game board, eight of them are handled as one unit (one group), and each group is treated as the above-mentioned special figure 1 display LED. It is also possible to perform display control as a group of LEDs of the display 38a, the special display 2 display LED display 38b, and the hold composite display LED display 38c.

  Thus, even under the configuration in which the LEDs are concentratedly arranged in the form of dots, straight lines or arcs, the blinking cycle of the LED indicators 38a and 38b of the special symbol display system and the LED display 38c of the reserved number display system By making the difference, it is possible to clearly distinguish the role played by the display of the segments of both indicators, and to make the player easily recognize and understand the function of the segment visually.

<Modification 4>
In the above embodiment, the light emitting diode (LED) is used to form the special symbol display means, the special symbol reservation number display means, and the like. However, instead of the LED, other light emitting elements such as a fluorescent display tube, Incandescent filament, liquid crystal display (LCD)
Etc. can be used for the segment. Further, as the light emission pattern, distinction can be added by the brightness (degree of brightness), the color of the light emitter, and the like in addition to the states of lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and blinking interval (flashing speed).

  INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is useful for a ball game ball that uses a LED to perform a special symbol variation display and a hold number display.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame,
3 Game board,
3a gaming area,
4 outer frame,
5 ball guide rail,
6 Glass door,
7 Front operation panel
8 Upper tray unit,
9 Top saucer,
11 Ball rental button,
12 Card return button,
13 Frame production button,
14 Ball release button,
15 Launch control handle,
19 game ball dispensing device,
20 Main control unit,
21 External terminal board for frame,
24 production control unit,
28 Launch control board,
29 payout control board,
31 power supply board,
32 launcher,
34 Upper starting port,
34a Upper start sensor,
35 Lower starting port,
35a Lower start sensor,
36 liquid crystal display devices,
37 Normal design starting port,
37a Normal design start sensor,
38a 1st special symbol display device (LED display for special figure 1 display),
38b 2nd special symbol display device (LED display for special figure 2 display),
38c Hold composite display (LED display for hold composite display)
39 Block diagram and round display block,
39a Normal symbol display device,
39b Round number display device,
40, 50 Big prize opening,
41 Ordinary variable winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
42,52 Special variable prize device,
42a, 52a Big prize opening sensor,
42b, 52b open door,
42c, 52c
43 General prize opening,
43a General prize opening sensor,
44 Windmill,
45 Decorative lamp,
45a optical display device,
46 Speaker,
46a sound generator,
47 Movable wing pieces,
48 Center decoration,
49 Out mouth,
71 Movable body accessory motor,
201 main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 Production control CPU,
242 Production control ROM,
243 Production control RAM.

Claims (2)

Starting means provided in the game area;
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information when the detection switch provided in the starting means detects a game ball;
Based on the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means, lottery means for lottery whether to generate a game state advantageous to the player;
A variation display operation is performed in which the display of the variation display of the symbol for notifying the lottery result in the lottery means and the stop of the variation display are set as one set, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result. Design display means;
Until the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means is used for execution of the symbol variable display operation in the symbol display means, the game information is reserved and stored up to a predetermined maximum reserved memory number. Symbol holding storage means to perform,
A symbol hold number display means for displaying the number of reserved memories stored in the symbol hold storage means;
A display control means for controlling display in the symbol display means and the symbol hold number display means,
The symbol display means includes a group of LEDs including a predetermined LED that blinks during the variation display of the symbol,
The symbol hold number display means is composed of a plurality of LEDs for displaying information on the number of reserved memories in a plurality of display modes by a combination of lighting and blinking of the light emission pattern.
The display control means includes
A symbol display control means for performing display control in the symbol display means, and a symbol hold number display control means for performing display control in the symbol hold number display means,
The symbol display control means includes:
A symbol change operation counter that is updated in a first repetition period sufficiently shorter than the minimum time of the variation display and is not updated during the symbol stop display period;
Based on the value of the symbol variation operation counter, by switching on and off the predetermined LED in the symbol display means, the display mode of the predetermined LED during the variation display of the symbol is changed to a blinking display state. Design blinking control means for executing control to
A ball game machine characterized by that. A first starter and a second starter provided in the game area;
First acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information when the detection switch provided in the first start means detects a game ball;
Second acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information when the detection switch provided in the second starting means detects a game ball;
First lottery means for lottery whether to generate a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the game information acquired by the first acquisition means;
Based on the game information acquired by the second acquisition means, a second lottery means for drawing whether or not to generate a gaming state advantageous to the player;
A variable display operation is performed in which the start of the variable display of the first symbol and the stop of the variable display for notifying the lottery result in the first lottery means are set as one set, and the display mode according to the lottery result A first symbol display means for stopping and displaying one symbol;
A variable display operation is performed in which the start of the variable display of the second symbol for notifying the lottery result in the second lottery means and the stop of the variable display are set as one set, and the display mode according to the lottery result A second symbol display means for stopping and displaying two symbols;
Until the predetermined game information acquired by the first acquisition means is used for the execution of the variable display operation of the symbol in the first symbol display means, the predetermined maximum reserved memory number is used as an upper limit. A first symbol storage unit for storing information on hold;
Until the predetermined game information acquired by the second acquisition means is used for the execution of the variable display operation of the symbol in the second symbol display means, the game is limited to a predetermined maximum reserved memory number. A second symbol hold storage means for storing information on hold;
A first symbol hold number display means for displaying the number of reserved memories stored in the first symbol hold storage means;
A second symbol hold number display means for displaying the number of reserved memories stored in the second symbol hold storage means;
Display control means for controlling display in the first symbol display means, the second symbol display means, the first symbol hold number display means, and the second symbol hold number display means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The first symbol display means and the second symbol display means are each configured by a group of LEDs including a predetermined LED blinking during the variable display of the first symbol and the second symbol,
The first symbol hold number display means and the second symbol hold number display means each include a plurality of LEDs that display information on the number of reserved memories in a plurality of display modes by a combination of lighting and flashing of the light emission pattern. Configured,
The display control means includes
A first symbol variation operation counter that is updated in a first repetition period that is sufficiently shorter than the shortest time of the variation display during the variation display period of the first symbol;
Based on the value of the first symbol variation operation counter, the predetermined LED in the first special symbol is displayed during the variation display by switching on and off the predetermined LED in the first symbol display means. A first symbol blinking control means for executing control for setting the display mode to a blinking display state;
A second symbol variation operation counter that is updated in the first repetition period during the variation display period of the second symbol;
Based on the value of the second symbol variation operation counter, the predetermined LED is displayed during the variation display of the second symbol by switching on and off the predetermined LED in the second symbol display means. A second symbol blinking control means for executing control for setting the mode to the blinking display state,
A ball game machine characterized by that.

Images